LTE Physical Layer

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)Technical Specification

3rd Generation Partnership Project;Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network;Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA);

LTE Physical Layer - General Description(Release 8)

The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organisational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organisational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification.Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organisational Partners' Publications Offices.

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)2Release 8T

Keywords UMTS, radio, layer 1

3GPP

Postal address

3GPP support office address 650 Route des Lucioles - Sophia Antipolis

Valbonne - FRANCE Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16

Internet http://www.3gpp.org

Copyright Notification

No part may be reproduced except as authorized by written permission. The copyright and the foregoing restriction extend to reproduction in all media.

© 2007, 3GPP Organizational Partners (ARIB, ATIS, CCSA, ETSI, TTA, TTC).

All rights reserved.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)3Release 8T

Contents Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................4 1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................5 2 References ................................................................................................................................................5 3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................5 3.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 5 3.2 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 5 3.3 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 6 4 General description of LTE Layer 1 ........................................................................................................6 4.1 Relation to other layers ...................................................................................................................................... 6 4.1.1 General Protocol Architecture...................................................................................................................... 6 4.1.2 Service provided to higher layers................................................................................................................. 7 4.2 General description of Layer 1 .......................................................................................................................... 7 4.2.1 Multiple Access............................................................................................................................................ 7 4.2.2 Physical channels and modulation ............................................................................................................... 8 4.2.3 Channel coding and interleaving.................................................................................................................. 8 4.2.4 Physical layer procedures............................................................................................................................. 9 4.2.5 Physical layer measurements ....................................................................................................................... 9 5 Document structure of LTE physical layer specification .........................................................................9 5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 9 5.2 TS 36.201: Physical layer – General description ............................................................................................... 9 5.3 TS 36.211: Physical channels and modulation ................................................................................................ 10 5.4 TS 36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding.................................................................................................. 10 5.5 TS 36.213: Physical layer procedures.............................................................................................................. 10 5.6 TS 36.214: Physical layer – Measurements ..................................................................................................... 11

Annex A (informative): Preferred mathematical notations................................................................12

Annex B (informative): Change history ...............................................................................................13

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)4Release 8T

Foreword This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).

The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows:

Version x.y.z

where:

x the first digit:

1 presented to TSG for information;

2 presented to TSG for approval;

3 or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control.

y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc.

z the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.

3GPP

Simon

高亮

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)5Release 8T

1 Scope The present document describes a general description of the physical layer of the E-UTRA radio interface. The present document also describes the document structure of the 3GPP physical layer specifications, i.e. TS 36.200 series. The TS 36.200 series specifies the Uu point for the 3G LTE mobile system, and defines the minimum level of specifications required for basic connections in terms of mutual connectivity and compatibility.

2 References The following documents contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the present document.

• References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or non-specific.

• For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply.

• For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document.

[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications".

[2] 3GPP TS 36.211: "Physical channels and modulation".

[3] 3GPP TS 36.212: "Multiplexing and channel coding".

[4] 3GPP TS 36.213: "Physical layer procedures".

[5] 3GPP TS 36.214: "Physical layer – Measurements".

3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations

3.1 Definitions For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].

Definition format

<defined term>: <definition>.

example: text used to clarify abstract rules by applying them literally.

3.2 Symbols For the purposes of the present document, the following symbols apply:

Symbol format

<symbol> <Explanation>

3GPP

Administrator

Typewriter

TS 36.200系列文档定义了3G LTE移动系统中的Uu点

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)6Release 8T

3.3 Abbreviations For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].

Abbreviation format

BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying CQI Channel Quality Indicator CP Cyclic Prefix CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check eNode-B Evolved Node B E-UTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access FDD Frequency Division Duplex HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request LTE Long Term Evolution MAC Medium Access Control MBMS Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service MBSFN Multicast/Broadcast over Single Frequency Network MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel PCFICH Physical Control Format Indicator Channel PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel PHICH Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel PMCH Physical Multicast Channel PRACH Physical Random Access Channel PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QPP Quadratic Permutation Polynomial QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift KeyingRLC Radio Link Control RRC Radio Resource Control RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator RSRP Reference Signal Received Power RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality SAP Service Access Point SC-FDMA Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access TDD Time Division Duplex TX Diversity Transmit Diversity UE User Equipment <ACRONYM> <Explanation>

4 General description of LTE Layer 1

4.1 Relation to other layers

4.1.1 General Protocol Architecture The radio interface described in this specification covers the interface between the User Equipment (UE) and the network. The radio interface is composed of the Layer 1, 2 and 3. The TS 36.200 series describes the Layer 1 (Physical Layer) specifications. Layers 2 and 3 are described in the 36.300 series.

3GPP

Administrator

Typewriter

信道质量指示器

Administrator

Typewriter

多媒体广播和多播业务

Administrator

Typewriter

单频网络的多播/广播业务

Administrator

Typewriter

物理广播信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理控制格式指示信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理下行共享信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理下行控制信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理HARQ指示信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理多播信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理随机接入信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理上行控制信道

Administrator

Typewriter

物理上行共享信道

Administrator

Typewriter

二次排列多项式

Administrator

Typewriter

无线资源控制

Administrator

Typewriter

接收信号强度指示

Administrator

Typewriter

信号参考接收功率

Administrator

Typewriter

信号参考接收质量

Administrator

Typewriter

单载波频分多址

Administrator

Typewriter

发送分集

Administrator

Typewriter

用户设备UE与网络之间的接口

Administrator

Typewriter

TS 36.200系列描述了Layer1（PHY） TS 36.300系列秒速了Layer2和Layer3（分别包含MAC和RRC）

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)7Release 8T

Radio Resource Control (RRC)

Medium Access Control

Transport channels

Physical layer

Con

trol /

Mea

sure

men

ts

Layer 3

Logical channelsLayer 2

Layer 1

Figure 1: Radio interface protocol architecture around the physical layer

Figure 1 shows the E-UTRA radio interface protocol architecture around the physical layer (Layer 1). The physical layer interfaces the Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of Layer 2 and the Radio Resource Control (RRC) Layer of Layer 3. The circles between different layer/sub-layers indicate Service Access Points (SAPs). The physical layer offers a transport channel to MAC. The transport channel is characterized by how the information is transferred over the radio interface. MAC offers different logical channels to the Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer of Layer 2. A logical channel is characterized by the type of information transferred.

4.1.2 Service provided to higher layers The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these services is through the use of a transport channel via the MAC sub-layer. The physical layer is expected to perform the following functions in order to provide the data transport service:

- Error detection on the transport channel and indication to higher layers

- FEC encoding/decoding of the transport channel

- Hybrid ARQ soft-combining

- Rate matching of the coded transport channel to physical channels

- Mapping of the coded transport channel onto physical channels

- Power weighting of physical channels

- Modulation and demodulation of physical channels

- Frequency and time synchronisation

- Radio characteristics measurements and indication to higher layers

- Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) antenna processing

- Transmit Diversity (TX diversity)

- Beamforming

- RF processing. (Note: RF processing aspects are specified in the TS 36.100 series)

4.2 General description of Layer 1

4.2.1 Multiple Access The multiple access scheme for the LTE physical layer is based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) with a cyclic prefix (CP) in the downlink, and on Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) with a cyclic prefix in the uplink. To support transmission in paired and unpaired spectrum, two duplex modes

3GPP

Administrator

Typewriter

本图描述了PHY相关的接口协议结构。PHY与Layer2的 MAC以及Layer3的RRC之间具有接口连接。

Administrator

Typewriter

PHY提供传输通道给MAC，其特点是信息是如何在无线接口传输的

Administrator

Typewriter

MAC提供逻辑通道给RLC（无线链路控制），其特点是传输信息的类型不同

Administrator

Typewriter

物理层为高层提供数据传输服务

Administrator

Typewriter

传输通道的错误检查以及指示给高层

Administrator

Typewriter

传输通道FEC编码/解码

Administrator

Typewriter

软件混合HARQ

Administrator

Typewriter

编码传输通道与物理通道的速率匹配

Administrator

Typewriter

编码传输通道到物理通道的映射

Administrator

Typewriter

物理通道的功率加权

Administrator

Typewriter

物理通道调制与解调

Administrator

Typewriter

频率和时间同步

Administrator

Typewriter

无线特征测量及上报

Administrator

Typewriter

MIMO处理

Administrator

Typewriter

发送分集

Administrator

Typewriter

射频处理

Administrator

Typewriter

波束生成

Administrator

Typewriter

下行：OFDM —— 正交频分复用下行：SC-FDMA—— 单载波频分多址

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)8Release 8T

are supported: Frequency Division Duplex (FDD), supporting full duplex and half duplex operation, and Time Division Duplex (TDD).

The Layer 1 is defined in a bandwidth agnostic way based on resource blocks, allowing the LTE Layer 1 to adapt to various spectrum allocations. A resource block spans either 12 sub-carriers with a sub-carrier bandwidth of 15kHz or 24 sub-carriers with a sub-carrier bandwidth of 7.5kHz each over a slot duration of 0.5ms.

The radio frame structure type 1 is used for FDD (for both full duplex and half duplex operation) and has a duration of 10ms and consists of 20 slots with a slot duration of 0.5ms. Two adjacent slots form one sub-frame of length 1ms. The radio frame structure type 2 is used for TDD and consists of two half-frames with a duration of 5ms each and containing each 8 slots of length 0.5ms and three special fields (DwPTS, GP and UpPTS) which have configurable individual lengths and a total length of 1ms. A sub-frame consists of two adjacent slots, except for sub-frames 1 and 6, which consist of DwPTS, GP and UpPTS. Both 5ms and 10ms switch-point periodicity are supported. Further details on the LTE frame structure are specified in [2].

To support a Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS), LTE offers the possibility to transmit Multicast/Broadcast over a Single Frequency Network (MBSFN), where a time-synchronized common waveform is transmitted from multiple cells for a given duration. MBSFN transmission enables highly efficient MBMS, allowing for over-the-air combining of multi-cell transmissions in the UE, where the cyclic prefix is utilized to cover the difference in the propagation delays, which makes the MBSFN transmission appear to the UE as a transmission from a single large cell. Transmission on a dedicated carrier for MBSFN with the possibility to use a longer CP with a sub-carrier bandwidth of 7.5kHz is supported as well as transmission of MBSFN on a carrier with both MBMS transmissions and point-to-point transmissions using time division multiplexing.

Transmission with multiple input and multiple output antennas (MIMO) are supported with configurations in the downlink with two or four transmit antennas and two or four receive antennas, which allow for multi-layer transmissions with up to four streams. Multi-user MIMO i.e. allocation of different streams to different users is supported in both UL and DL.

4.2.2 Physical channels and modulation The physical channels defined in the downlink are:

• the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH),

• the Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH),

• the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH),

• the Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH),

• the Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH)

• and the Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH).

The physical channels defined in the uplink are:

• the Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH),

• the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH),

• and the Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH).

In addition, signals are defined as reference signals, primary and secondary synchronization signals.

The modulation schemes supported in the downlink and uplink are QPSK, 16QAM and 64QAM.

4.2.3 Channel coding and interleaving The channel coding scheme for transport blocks in LTE is Turbo Coding with a coding rate of R=1/3, two 8-state constituent encoders and a contention-free quadratic permutation polynomial (QPP) turbo code internal interleaver. Trellis termination is used for the turbo coding. Before the turbo coding, transport blocks are segmented into byte aligned segments with a maximum information block size of 6144 bits. Error detection is supported by the use of 24 bit CRC. Further channel coding schemes for BCH and control information are specified in [3].

3GPP

Administrator

Typewriter

支持FDD和TDD

Administrator

Typewriter

资源块（0.5ms）：跨12个子载波（每子载波带宽15KHz）或跨24个子载波（每子载波带宽7.5KHz）

Administrator

Typewriter

无线帧结构1：用于FDD（全双工和半双工），10ms，包含20个0.5ms资源块，临近的两个资源块构成一个子帧（1ms）

Administrator

Typewriter

无线帧结构2：用于TDD，包含两个5ms半帧，每个包含8个0.5ms的资源块和1ms的特殊域（DwPTS，GP和UpPTS）。临近的两个资源块组成子帧，子帧1和6除外。

Administrator

Typewriter

为支持广播和多播业务MBMS，LTE提供了一种在单频网络上传输MBMS业务数据的方法MBSFN，其从多个 cell传输一个时间同步的公共波形，传输既定的时间。 MBSFN传输可以更有效地传输MBMS业务，其允许将UE 来自多个cell的传输在空中链路进行组合，并使用CP 来消除传播延时的影响，从而使得MBSFN传输到UE时就好似是从一个大的cell来的。

Administrator

Typewriter

在一个专用的子载波（7.5KHz）上传输MBSFN，或在子载波上时分复用MBMS和点对点传输————两种支持模式

Administrator

Typewriter

在下行链路可以对MIMO天线进行配置，2或4发送天线，2或4接收天线，支持最多4个数据流的多层传输，也就是在上、下行允许不同的数据流给不同的用户。

Administrator

Typewriter

PDSCH物理层下行共享信道 PMCH物理层多播信道 PDCCH物理层下行控制信道 PBCH物理层广播信道 PCFICH物理层控制格式指示信道 PHICH物理层HARQ指示信道 PRACH物理层随机接入信道 PUSCH物理层上行共享信道 PUCCH物理层上行控制信道

Administrator

Typewriter

Turbo编码，1/3码率

Administrator

Note

Accepted set by Administrator

Administrator

Note

MigrationConfirmed set by Administrator

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)9Release 8T

4.2.4 Physical layer procedures There are several Physical layer procedures involved with LTE operation. Such procedures covered by the physical layer are;

- Cell search

- Power control

- Uplink synchronisation and Uplink timing control

- Random access related procedures

- HARQ related procedures

Through the control of physical layer resources in the frequency domain as well as in the time and power domain, implicit support of interference coordination is provided in LTE.

4.2.5 Physical layer measurements Radio characteristics are measured by the UE and the eNode-B and reported to higher layers in the network. These include, e.g. measurements for intra- and inter-frequency handover, inter RAT handover, timing measurements and measurements for RRM.

Measurements for inter-RAT handover are defined in support of handover to GSM, UTRA FDD and UTRA TDD.

5 Document structure of LTE physical layer specification

5.1 Overview The physical layer specification consists of a general document (TS 36.201), and four documents (TS 36.211 through 36.214). The relation between the physical layer specifications in the context of the higher layers is shown in Figure 2.

36.211 Physical Channels and

Modulation

36.212 Multiplexing and channel

coding

36.213 Physical layer procedures

36.214 Physical layer – Measurements

To/From Higher Layers

Figure 2: Relation between Physical Layer specifications

5.2 TS 36.201: Physical layer – General description The scope is to describe:

3GPP

Administrator

Typewriter

小区搜索

Administrator

Typewriter

功率控制

Administrator

Typewriter

上行同步和上行时序控制

Administrator

Typewriter

随机接入相关过程

Administrator

Typewriter

HARQ相关过程

Simon

文本框

UE和eNode-B完成多种测量并上报给高层。包括时延测量和频移测量。

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)10Release 8T

- The contents of the Layer 1 documents (TS 36.200 series);

- Where to find information;

- A general description of LTE Layer 1.

5.3 TS 36.211: Physical channels and modulation The scope of this specification is to establish the characteristics of the Layer-1 physical channels, generation of physical layer signals and modulation, and to specify:

- Definition of the uplink and downlink physical channels;

- The structure of the physical channels, frame format, physical resource elements, etc.;

- Modulation mapping (BPSK, QPSK, etc);

- Physical shared channel in uplink and downlink;

- Reference signal in uplink and downlink;

- Random access channel;

- Primary and secondary synchronization signals;

- OFDM signal generation in downlink;

- SC-FDMA signal generation in uplink;

- Scrambling, modulation and up conversion;

- Uplink-downlink timing relation

- Layer mapping and precoding in downlink.

5.4 TS 36.212: Multiplexing and channel coding The scope of this specification is to describe the transport channel and control channel data processing, including multiplexing, channel coding and interleaving, and to specify:

- Channel coding schemes;

- Coding of Layer 1 / Layer 2 control information;

- Interleaving;

- Rate matching;

5.5 TS 36.213: Physical layer procedures The scope of this specification is to establish the characteristics of the physical layer procedures, and to specify:

- Synchronisation procedures, including cell search procedure and timing synchronisation;

- Power control procedure;

- Random access procedure;

- Physical downlink shared channel related procedures, including CQI reporting and MIMO feedback;

- Physical uplink shared channel related procedures, including UE sounding and HARQ ACK/NACK detection;

- Physical shared control channel procedures, including assignment of shared control channels.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)11Release 8T

5.6 TS 36.214: Physical layer – Measurements The scope of this specification is to establish the characteristics of the physical layer measurements, and to specify:

- Measurements to be performed by Layer 1 in UE and E-UTRAN;

- Reporting of measurement results to higher layers and the network;

- Handover measurements, idle-mode measurements, etc.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)12Release 8T

Annex A (informative): Preferred mathematical notations The following table contains the preferred mathematical notations used in L1 documentation.

item notation multiply product cross sign, e.g. a×b matrix product dot sign, e.g. a⋅b

scalar product (product of a matrix by a scalar) dot sign, scalar should precede matrix e.g. ( ) ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡⋅+

vu

j1

matrix dimensioning number of rows × number of column, e.g.: R×C

Kronecker product a⊗b

bracketing of sets (all elements of same type, not ordered elements)

curly brackets {}, e.g.

{a1, a2, …,ap}, or{ } { }piia ,,2,1 …∈

bracketing of lists (all elements not necessary of same type, ordered elements) round brackets (), e.g. (A, u, x)

bracketing of sequences (all elements of same type, ordered elements) angle brackets, e.g. <a1, a2, …,ap> or { }piia

,,2,1 …∈

bracketing of function argument round brackets, e.g. f(x) bracketing of array index square brackets, e.g. a[x]

bracketing of matrix or vector square brackets [], e.g. , ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡yx [ ]yx , or ⎥

⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−1111

Separation of indexes use a comma : e.g. Ni,juse of italic for symbols a symbol should be either in italic or in normal font, but

mixing up should be avoided. bracketing of arithmetic expression to force precedence of operations

round brackets : e.g. ( ) cba ×+

necessity of bracketing arithmetic expressions When only + and × bracketing is not necessary. When the mod operator is used explicit bracketing of mod operands

and possibly result should be done. number type in a context of non negative integer numbers, some notes

should stress when a number is signed, or possibly fractional.

binary xor and and respectively use + or ⋅. If no "mod 2" is explicitly in the expression some text should stress that the operation is

modulo 2. matrix or vector transpose vT

1×1 matrices implicitly cast to its unique element. vector dot product uT⋅v for column vectors, and u⋅vT for line vectors complex conjugate v*

matrix or vector Hermitian transpose vH

real part and imaginary part of complex numbers. Re(x) and Im(x)

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.201 V8.1.0 (2007-11)13Release 8T

Annex B (informative): Change history

Change history Date TSG # TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Old New

02/10/06 - - - Draft version created - 0.0.013/10/06 - - - Endorsed by RAN1 0.0.1 0.1.001/11/06 - - - Editors version at RAN1#47 0.1.0 0.1.104/11/06 - - - Revised editors version at RAN1#47 0.1.1 0.1.205/02/07 - - - Editors version at RAN1#48 0.2.0 0.2.120/02/07 - - - Endorsed by RAN1#48 0.2.1 0.3.026/02/07 - - - Editors version after RAN1#48 0.3.0 0.3.126/02/07 - - - Editors version after RAN1#48 0.3.1 0.3.203/03/07 RAN#35 RP-070168 - For information at RAN#35 0.3.2 1.0.001/05/07 - - - Editors version at RAN1#49 1.0.0 1.0.111/05/07 - - - Editors version at RAN1#49 1.0.1 1.0.211/05/07 - - - Endorsed by RAN1#49 1.0.2 1.1.021/06/07 - - - Editors version after RAN1#49 1.1.0 1.1.111/05/07 - - - Endorsed by RAN1#49bis 1.1.1 1.2.004/09/07 - - - Editors version after RAN1#50 1.2.0 1.2.107/09/07 - - - Editors version after RAN1#50 1.2.1 1.2.210/09/07 RAN#37 RP-070728 - For approval at RAN#37 1.2.2 2.0.012/09/07 RAN_37 RP-070728 Approved version 2.0.0 8.0.028/11/07 RAN_38 RP-070949 0001 1 Alignment of 36.201 with other LTE L1 specifications 8.0.0 8.1.0

3GPP



Physical Channels and Modulation(Release 8)

The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification.Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners' Publications Offices.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)2Release 8


3GPP

Postal address

3GPP support office address 650 Route des Lucioles - Sophia Antipolis

Valbonne - FRANCE Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16






3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)3Release 8

Contents Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................6 1 Scope .......................................................................................................................................................7 2 References ................................................................................................................................................7 3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................7 3.1 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 7 3.2 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 9 4 Frame structure.........................................................................................................................................9 4.1 Frame structure type 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 9 4.2 Frame structure type 2 ....................................................................................................................................... 9 5 Uplink.....................................................................................................................................................11 5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 11 5.1.1 Physical channels ....................................................................................................................................... 11 5.1.2 Physical signals .......................................................................................................................................... 11 5.2 Slot structure and physical resources ............................................................................................................... 11 5.2.1 Resource grid ............................................................................................................................................. 11 5.2.2 Resource elements...................................................................................................................................... 12 5.2.3 Resource blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 12 5.3 Physical uplink shared channel ........................................................................................................................ 13 5.3.1 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 13 5.3.2 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 13 5.3.3 Transform precoding.................................................................................................................................. 14 5.3.4 Mapping to physical resources ................................................................................................................... 14 5.4 Physical uplink control channel ....................................................................................................................... 15 5.4.1 PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b..................................................................................................................... 15 5.4.2 PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b..................................................................................................................... 17 5.4.3 Mapping to physical resources ................................................................................................................... 18 5.5 Reference signals ............................................................................................................................................. 19 5.5.1 Generation of the reference signal sequence .............................................................................................. 19 5.5.1.1 Base sequences of length RB

sc3N or larger............................................................................................ 19 5.5.1.2 Base sequences of length less than RB

sc3N ........................................................................................... 20 5.5.1.3 Group hopping...................................................................................................................................... 21 5.5.1.4 Sequence hopping................................................................................................................................. 22 5.5.2 Demodulation reference signal................................................................................................................... 22 5.5.2.1 Demodulation reference signal for PUSCH.......................................................................................... 22 5.5.2.1.1 Reference signal sequence .............................................................................................................. 22 5.5.2.1.2 Mapping to physical resources........................................................................................................ 23 5.5.2.2 Demodulation reference signal for PUCCH ......................................................................................... 23 5.5.2.2.1 Reference signal sequence .............................................................................................................. 23 5.5.2.2.2 Mapping to physical resources........................................................................................................ 24 5.5.3 Sounding reference signal .......................................................................................................................... 24 5.5.3.1 Sequence generation............................................................................................................................. 24 5.5.3.2 Mapping to physical resources ............................................................................................................. 25 5.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation............................................................................................................ 25 5.7 Physical random access channel ...................................................................................................................... 25 5.7.1 Time and frequency structure..................................................................................................................... 25 5.7.2 Preamble sequence generation ................................................................................................................... 26 5.7.3 Baseband signal generation........................................................................................................................ 30 5.8 Modulation and upconversion.......................................................................................................................... 30 6 Downlink................................................................................................................................................31 6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 31 6.1.1 Physical channels ....................................................................................................................................... 31 6.1.2 Physical signals .......................................................................................................................................... 31

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)4Release 8

6.2 Slot structure and physical resource elements ................................................................................................. 32 6.2.1 Resource grid ............................................................................................................................................. 32 6.2.2 Resource elements...................................................................................................................................... 32 6.2.3 Resource blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 33 6.2.4 Resource-element groups ........................................................................................................................... 34 6.2.5 Guard period for half-duplex FDD operation............................................................................................. 35 6.2.6 Guard Period for TDD Operation............................................................................................................... 35 6.3 General structure for downlink physical channels ........................................................................................... 35 6.3.1 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 35 6.3.2 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 36 6.3.3 Layer mapping ........................................................................................................................................... 36 6.3.3.1 Layer mapping for transmission on a single antenna port .................................................................... 36 6.3.3.2 Layer mapping for spatial multiplexing ............................................................................................... 36 6.3.3.3 Layer mapping for transmit diversity ................................................................................................... 37 6.3.4 Precoding ................................................................................................................................................... 37 6.3.4.1 Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port ............................................................................ 37 6.3.4.2 Precoding for spatial multiplexing........................................................................................................ 37 6.3.4.2.1 Precoding for zero and small-delay CDD ....................................................................................... 37 6.3.4.2.2 Precoding for large delay CDD....................................................................................................... 38 6.3.4.2.3 Codebook for precoding ................................................................................................................. 39 6.3.4.3 Precoding for transmit diversity ........................................................................................................... 40 6.3.5 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 41 6.4 Physical downlink shared channel ................................................................................................................... 41 6.5 Physical multicast channel............................................................................................................................... 41 6.6 Physical broadcast channel .............................................................................................................................. 42 6.6.1 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 42 6.6.2 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 42 6.6.3 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 42 6.6.4 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 42 6.7 Physical control format indicator channel ....................................................................................................... 43 6.7.1 Scrambling ................................................................................................................................................. 43 6.7.2 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 43 6.7.3 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 43 6.7.4 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 43 6.8 Physical downlink control channel .................................................................................................................. 44 6.8.1 PDCCH formats ......................................................................................................................................... 44 6.8.2 PDCCH multiplexing and scrambling........................................................................................................ 44 6.8.3 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 45 6.8.4 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 45 6.8.5 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 45 6.9 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel........................................................................................................... 46 6.9.1 Modulation ................................................................................................................................................. 46 6.9.2 Layer mapping and precoding.................................................................................................................... 47 6.9.3 Mapping to resource elements.................................................................................................................... 49 6.10 Reference signals ............................................................................................................................................. 50 6.10.1 Cell-specific reference signals ................................................................................................................... 50 6.10.1.1 Sequence generation............................................................................................................................. 51 6.10.1.2 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 51 6.10.2 MBSFN reference signals .......................................................................................................................... 53 6.10.2.1 Sequence generation............................................................................................................................. 53 6.10.2.2 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 53 6.10.3 UE-specific reference signals..................................................................................................................... 55 6.10.3.1 Sequence generation............................................................................................................................. 55 6.10.3.2 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 56 6.11 Synchronization signals ................................................................................................................................... 57 6.11.1 Primary synchronization signal .................................................................................................................. 57 6.11.1.1 Sequence generation............................................................................................................................. 57 6.11.1.2 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 57 6.11.2 Secondary synchronization signal .............................................................................................................. 58 6.11.2.1 Sequence generation............................................................................................................................. 58 6.11.2.2 Mapping to resource elements .............................................................................................................. 59 6.12 OFDM baseband signal generation.................................................................................................................. 60

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)5Release 8

6.13 Modulation and upconversion.......................................................................................................................... 61 7 Generic functions ...................................................................................................................................61 7.1 Modulation mapper.......................................................................................................................................... 61 7.1.1 BPSK ............................................................................................................................................................... 61 7.1.2 QPSK............................................................................................................................................................... 62 7.1.3 16QAM............................................................................................................................................................ 62 7.1.4 64QAM............................................................................................................................................................ 62 7.2 Pseudo-random sequence generation ............................................................................................................... 63 8 Timing ....................................................................................................................................................64 8.1 Uplink-downlink frame timing ........................................................................................................................ 64

Annex A (informative): Change history ...............................................................................................64

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)6Release 8



Version x.y.z

where:

x the first digit:






3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)7Release 8

1 Scope The present document describes the physical channels for evolved UTRA.






[2] 3GPP TS 36.201: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer – General Description".

[3] 3GPP TS 36.212: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding".

[4] 3GPP TS 36.213: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures".

[5] 3GPP TS 36.214: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer – Measurements".

[6] 3GPP TS 36.104: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception”.



),( lk Resource element with frequency-domain index k and time-domain index l )(

,plka Value of resource element ),( lk [for antenna port p ]

D Matrix for supporting cyclic delay diversity 0f Carrier frequency

PUSCHscM Scheduled bandwidth for uplink transmission, expressed as a number of subcarriers PUSCHRBM Scheduled bandwidth for uplink transmission, expressed as a number of resource blocks (q)M bit Number of coded bits to transmit on a physical channel [for code word q ] (q)M symb Number of modulation symbols to transmit on a physical channel [for code word q ]

Administrator

Typewriter

资源块标记，k标记频域，l标记时域

Administrator

Typewriter

资源块值

Administrator

Typewriter

预定上行传输使用带宽，用子载波的序号表示

Administrator

Typewriter

预定上行传输使用带宽，用资源块的序号标示

Administrator

Typewriter

物理信道上传输的编码bit的数目

Administrator

Typewriter

物理信道上输出的调制符号的数目

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)8Release 8

layersymbM Number of modulation symbols to transmit per layer for a physical channel apsymbM Number of modulation symbols to transmit per antenna port for a physical channel

N A constant equal to 2048 for kHz 15=Δf and 4096 for kHz 5.7=Δf

lN ,CP Downlink cyclic prefix length for OFDM symbol l in a slot (1)csN Number of cyclic shifts used for PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b in a resource block with a mix of

formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b (2)RBN Bandwidth reserved for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b, expressed in multiples of RB

scN PUCCHRBN Number of resource blocks in a slot used for PUCCH transmission (set by higher layers) cellIDN Physical layer cell identity MBSFNIDN MBSFN area identity DLRBN Downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of RB

scN DL min,

RBN Smallest downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of RBscN

DL max,RBN Largest downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of RB

scN ULRBN Uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of RB

scN ULmin,

RBN Smallest uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of RBscN

ULmax,RBN Largest uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in multiples of RB

scN DLsymbN Number of OFDM symbols in a downlink slot ULsymbN Number of SC-FDMA symbols in an uplink slot RBscN Resource block size in the frequency domain, expressed as a number of subcarriers PUCCHRSN Number of reference symbols per slot for PUCCH

TAN Timing offset between uplink and downlink radio frames at the UE, expressed in units of sT )1(

PUCCHn Resource index for PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b )2(

PUCCHn Resource index for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b

PDCCHn Number of PDCCHs present in a subframe

PRBn Physical resource block number

VRBn Virtual resource block number

RNTIn Radio network temporary identifier

fn System frame number

sn Slot number within a radio frame P Number of cell-specific antenna ports p Antenna port number q Code word number

( )ts pl

)( Time-continuous baseband signal for antenna port p and OFDM symbol l in a slot

fT Radio frame duration

sT Basic time unit

slotT Slot duration W Precoding matrix for downlink spatial multiplexing

PRACHβ Amplitude scaling for PRACH

PUCCHβ Amplitude scaling for PUCCH

PUSCHβ Amplitude scaling for PUSCH

SRSβ Amplitude scaling for sounding reference symbols fΔ Subcarrier spacing

RAfΔ Subcarrier spacing for the random access preamble υ Number of transmission layers

Administrator

Typewriter

物理信道上每层传输的调制符号数目

Administrator

Typewriter

物理信道上每天线端口传输的调制符号数目

Administrator

Typewriter

FFT点数，子载波带宽为15kHz时，N=2048；子载波带宽为7.5kHz时，N=4096

Administrator

Typewriter

下行OFDM符号l的循环前缀长度

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)9Release 8

3.2 Abbreviations For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply:

CCE Control Channel Element CDD Cyclic Delay Diversity PBCH Physical broadcast channel PCFICH Physical control format indicator channel PDCCH Physical downlink control channel PDSCH Physical downlink shared channel PHICH Physical hybrid-ARQ indicator channel PMCH Physical multicast channel PRACH Physical random access channel PUCCH Physical uplink control channel PUSCH Physical uplink shared channel

4 Frame structure Throughout this specification, unless otherwise noted, the size of various fields in the time domain is expressed as a number of time units ( )2048150001s ×=T seconds.

Downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with ms 10307200 sf =×= TT duration. Two radio frame structures are supported:

- Type 1, applicable to FDD,

- Type 2, applicable to TDD.

4.1 Frame structure type 1 Frame structure type 1 is applicable to both full duplex and half duplex FDD. Each radio frame is

ms 10307200 sf =⋅= TT long and consists of 20 slots of length ms 5.0T15360 sslot =⋅=T , numbered from 0 to 19. A subframe is defined as two consecutive slots where subframe i consists of slots i2 and 12 +i .

For FDD, 10 subframes are available for downlink transmission and 10 subframes are available for uplink transmissions in each 10 ms interval. Uplink and downlink transmissions are separated in the frequency domain. In half-duplex FDD operation, the UE cannot transmit and receive at the same time while there are no such restrictions in full-duplex FDD.

Figure 4.1-1: Frame structure type 1.

4.2 Frame structure type 2 Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. Each radio frame of length ms 10307200 sf =⋅= TT consists of two half-frames of length fT = ms 5153600 s =⋅T each. Each half-frame consists of eight slots of length

ms 5.015360 sslot =⋅= TT and three special fields, DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS. The length of DwPTS and UpPTS is given by Table 4.2-1 subject to the total length of DwPTS, GP and UpPTS being equal to ms 107203 s =⋅T . Subframe 1 in all

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)10Release 8

configurations and subframe 6 in configurations 0, 1, 2 and 6 in Table 4.2-2 consists of DwPTS, GP and UpPTS. All other subframes are defined as two slots where subframe i consists of slots i2 and 12 +i .

Subframes 0 and 5 and DwPTS are always reserved for downlink transmission.

The supported uplink-downlink allocations are listed in Table 4.2-2 where, for each subframe in a radio frame, “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions, “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS, GP and UpPTS. Both 5 ms and 10 ms switch-point periodicity is supported.

In case of 5 ms switch-point periodicity, UpPTS and subframes 2 and 7 are reserved for uplink transmission.

In case of 10 ms switch-point periodicity, DwPTS exist in both half-frames while GP and UpPTS only exist in the first half-frame and DwPTS in the second half-frame has a length equal to ms 107203 s =T . UpPTS and subframe 2 are reserved for uplink transmission and subframes 7 to 9 are reserved for downlink transmission.

Figure 4.2-1: Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity).

Table 4.2-1: Lengths of DwPTS/GP/UpPTS.

Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix ConfigurationDwPTS GP UpPTS DwPTS GP UpPTS

0 s6592 T⋅ s21936 T⋅ s7680 T⋅ s20480 T⋅

1 s19760 T⋅ s8768 T⋅ s20480 T⋅ s7680 T⋅

2 s21952 T⋅ s6576 T⋅ s23040 T⋅ s5120 T⋅

3 s24144 T⋅ s4384 T⋅ s25600 T⋅ s2560 T⋅

s2560 T⋅

4 s26336 T⋅ s2192 T⋅

s2192 T⋅

s7680 T⋅ s17920 T⋅

5 s6592 T⋅ s19744 T⋅ s20480 T⋅ s5120 T⋅

6 s19760 T⋅ s6576 T⋅ s23040 T⋅ s2560 T⋅ s5120 T⋅

7 s21952 T⋅ s4384 T⋅ - - -

8 s24144 T⋅ s2192 T⋅

s4384 T⋅

- - -

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)11Release 8

Table 4.2-2: Uplink-downlink allocations.

Subframe number Configuration Switch-point periodicity0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 5 ms D S U U U D S U U U 1 5 ms D S U U D D S U U D 2 5 ms D S U D D D S U D D 3 10 ms D S U U U D D D D D 4 10 ms D S U U D D D D D D 5 10 ms D S U D D D D D D D 6 10 ms D S U U U D S U U D

5 Uplink

5.1 Overview The smallest resource unit for uplink transmissions is denoted a resource element and is defined in section 5.2.2.

5.1.1 Physical channels An uplink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers and is the interface defined between 36.212 and 36.211. The following uplink physical channels are defined:

- Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH

- Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH

- Physical Random Access Channel, PRACH

5.1.2 Physical signals An uplink physical signal is used by the physical layer but does not carry information originating from higher layers. The following uplink physical signals are defined:

- Reference signal

5.2 Slot structure and physical resources

5.2.1 Resource grid

The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of RBsc

ULRB NN subcarriers and UL

symbN SC-FDMA

symbols. The resource grid is illustrated in Figure 5.2.1-1. The quantity ULRBN depends on the uplink transmission

bandwidth configured in the cell and shall fulfil

ULmax,RB

ULRB

ULmin,RB NNN ≤≤

where 6ULmin,RB =N and 110ULmax,

RB =N is the smallest and largest uplink bandwidth, respectively, supported by the

current version of this specification. The set of allowed values for ULRBN is given by [6].

The number of SC-FDMA symbols in a slot depends on the cyclic prefix length configured by higher layers and is given in Table 5.2.3-1.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)12Release 8

ULsymbN

slotT

0=l 1ULsymb −= Nl

RB

scU

LR

BN

N×

RB

scN

RBsc

ULsymb NN ×

),( lk

0=k

1RBsc

ULRB −= NNk

Figure 5.2.1-1: Uplink resource grid.

5.2.2 Resource elements Each element in the resource grid is called a resource element and is uniquely defined by the index pair ( )lk, in a slot

where 1,...,0 RBsc

ULRB −= NNk and 1,...,0 UL

symb −= Nl are the indices in the frequency and time domain, respectively.

Resource element ( )lk, corresponds to the complex value lka , . Quantities lka , corresponding to resource elements not used for transmission of a physical channel or a physical signal in a slot shall be set to zero.

5.2.3 Resource blocks

A physical resource block is defined as ULsymbN consecutive SC-FDMA symbols in the time domain and

RBscN consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain, where UL

symbN and RBscN are given by Table 5.2.3-1. A physical

resource block in the uplink thus consists of RBsc

ULsymb NN × resource elements, corresponding to one slot in the time

domain and 180 kHz in the frequency domain.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)13Release 8

Table 5.2.3-1: Resource block parameters.

Configuration RBscN UL

symbN

Normal cyclic prefix 12 7 Extended cyclic prefix 12 6

The relation between the physical resource block number PRBn in the frequency domain and resource elements ),( lk in a slot is given by

⎥⎥⎦

⎥

⎢⎢⎣

⎢= RB

scPRB N

kn

5.3 Physical uplink shared channel The baseband signal representing the physical uplink shared channel is defined in terms of the following steps:

- scrambling

- modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols

- transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols

- mapping of complex-valued symbols to resource elements

- generation of complex-valued time-domain SC-FDMA signal for each antenna port

Figure 5.3-1: Overview of uplink physical channel processing.

5.3.1 Scrambling The block of bits )1(),...,0( bit −Mbb , where bitM is the number of bits transmitted on the physical uplink shared channel in one subframe, shall be scrambled with a UE-specific scrambling sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits )1(

~),...,0(

~bit −Mbb according to

( ) 2mod)()()(~

icibib +=

where the scrambling sequence )(ic is given by Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised

with ⎣ ⎦ cellID

9s

14RNTIinit 222 Nnnc +⋅+⋅= at the start of each subframe.

5.3.2 Modulation

The block of scrambled bits )1(~

),...,0(~

bit −Mbb shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd . Table 5.3.2-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical uplink shared channel.

Table 5.3.2-1: Uplink modulation schemes

Physical channel Modulation schemesPUSCH QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)14Release 8

5.3.3 Transform precoding

The block of complex-valued symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd is divided into PUSCHscsymb MM sets, each corresponding

to one SC-FDMA symbol. Transform precoding shall be applied according to

1,...,0

1,...,0

)(1)(

PUSCHscsymb

PUSCHsc

1

0

2PUSCHscPUSCH

sc

PUSCHsc

PUSCHsc PUSCH

sc

−=

−=

+⋅=+⋅ ∑−

=

−

MMl

Mk

eiMldM

kMlzM

i

Mikj π

resulting in a block of complex-valued symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mzz . The variable ULRB

PUSCHRB

PUSCHsc NMM ⋅= , where

PUSCHRBM represents the bandwidth of the PUSCH in terms of resource blocks, and shall fulfil

ULRB

PUSCHRB

532 532 NM ≤⋅⋅= ααα

where 532 ,, ααα is a set of non-negative integers.

5.3.4 Mapping to physical resources The block of complex-valued symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mzz shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor

PUSCHβ and mapped in sequence starting with )0(z to physical resource blocks assigned for transmission of PUSCH. The mapping to resource elements ( )lk, corresponding to the physical resource blocks assigned for transmission and not used for transmission of reference signals shall be in increasing order of first the index k , then the index l , starting with the first slot in the subframe.

If uplink frequency-hopping is disabled or the hopping is included in the uplink scheduling grant, the set of physical resource blocks to be used for transmission are given by VRBPRB nn = where VRBn is obtained from the uplink scheduling grant as described in [4].

If uplink frequency-hopping with predefined hopping pattern is enabled, the set of physical resource blocks to be used for transmission in slot sn is given by the scheduling grant together with a predefined pattern according to

( ) ( ) ( )( )( )⎣ ⎦

2~2)(~)(

hopping subframeintra20hopping subframeinter210

mod)(mod~21~)(~

PUCCHRBVRBVRB

PUCCHRBsPRBsPRB

sx

sx

sbsbRBm

sbRBVRB

sbRB

sbRBhopVRBsPRB

Nnn

Nnnnn

nnnn

i

NNifNnNNifnnn

−=

+=

⎩⎨⎧

−+⋅−+⋅

=

⋅⋅−−+⋅+=

where VRBn is obtained from the scheduling grant as described in [4]. The number of resource blocks in a slot used for

PUCCH transmission, PUCCHRBN , is configured by higher layers. The size sb

RBN of each sub-band is given by

( )⎣ ⎦sbPUCCHRB

ULRB

sbRB NNNN −= , where the number of sub-bands sbN is given by higher layers. The function

{ }1,0)(m ∈if determines whether mirroring is used or not.

The hopping function )(hop if is given by

( )

⎩⎨⎧

−+−⋅−

=

⎩⎨⎧

+−<

=

hopping subframeintra1)1(15hopping subframeinter8

otherwisemod)()( if)(

)(

s

sbRBcshop

cshop

nK

NifKifKiif

if

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)15Release 8

where { }1,...,2,1)( sbcs −∈ Nif .

5.4 Physical uplink control channel The physical uplink control channel, PUCCH, carries uplink control information. The PUCCH is never transmitted simultaneously with the PUSCH from the same UE. For frame structure type 2, the PUCCH is not transmitted in the UpPTS field.

The physical uplink control channel supports multiple formats as shown in Table 5.4-1. Formats 2a and 2b are supported for normal cyclic prefix only.

Table 5.4-1: Supported PUCCH formats.

PUCCH format

Modulation scheme

Number of bits per subframe, bitM

1 N/A N/A 1a BPSK 1 1b QPSK 2 2 QPSK 20 2a QPSK+BPSK 21 2b QPSK+QPSK 22

All PUCCH formats use a cyclic shift of a sequence in each symbol, where ),(cellcs lnn s is used to derive the cyclic shift

for the different PUCCH formats. The quantity ),(cellcs lnn s varies with the symbol number l and the slot number sn

according to

∑=⋅++⋅=

3

0 sULsymbs

cellcs 2)44(),(

iiilnNclnn

where the pseudo-random sequence )(ic is defined by section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be

initialized with ( )cellIDinit Nfc = at the beginning of each radio frame.

The physical resources used for PUCCH depends on two parameters, (2)RBN and (1)

csN , given by higher layers. The

variable 0(2)RB ≥N denotes the bandwidth in terms of resource blocks that are reserved for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b

transmission in each slot. The variable { }8,...,1,0(1)cs ∈N and denotes the number of cyclic shift used for PUCCH formats

1/1a/1b in a resource block used for a mix of formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b. At most one resource block in each slot supports a mix of formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b. Resources used for transmission of PUCCH format 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b are represented by the non-negative indices (1)

PUCCHn and )2( (1)cs

RBsc

RBsc

(2)RB

(2)PUCCH −−+< NNNNn , respectively.

5.4.1 PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b For PUCCH format 1, information is carried by the presence/absence of transmission of PUCCH from the UE. In the remainder of this section, 1)0( =d shall be assumed for PUCCH format 1.

For PUCCH formats 1a and 1b, one or two explicit bits are transmitted, respectively. The block of bits )1(),...,0( bit −Mbb shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a complex-valued symbol )0(d . The

modulation schemes for the different PUCCH formats are given by Table 5.4-1.

The complex-valued symbol )0(d shall be multiplied with a cyclically shifted length 12PUCCHseq =N sequence )()(

, nr vuα

according to

PUCCHseq

)(, ,...,1,0 ),()0()( Nnnrdny vu =⋅= α

where )()(, nr vuα is defined by section 5.5.1 with PUCCH

seqRSsc NM = . The cyclic shift α varies between symbols and slots as

defined below.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)16Release 8

The block of complex-valued symbols )1(),...,0( PUCCHseq −Nyy shall be block-wise spread with the orthogonal sequence

)(oc

iwn according to

( ) ( )nymwnNmNNmz n ⋅=+⋅+⋅⋅ )('oc

PUCCHseq

PUCCHseq

PUCCHSF

where

1,0'

1,...,0

1,...,0PUCCHseq

PUCCHSF

=

−=

−=

m

Nn

Nm

with 4PUCCHSF =N . The sequence )(

ociwn is given by Table 5.4.1-1.

Resources used for transmission of PUCCH format 1, 1a and 1b are identified by a resource index (1)PUCCHn from which

the orthogonal sequence index )( soc nn and the cyclic shift )( snα are determined according to

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦

( )( )[ ]( )[ ]⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

′++Δ⋅′+

′Δ++Δ⋅′+=

⋅=

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

′Δ⋅′⋅

′Δ⋅′=

prefix cyclic extendedfor modmod2)()(),(

prefix cyclic normalfor modmodmod)()(),()(

)(2)(

prefix cyclic extendedfor )(2

prefix cyclic normalfor )()(

RBscsoc

PUCCHoffset

PUCCHshifts

cellcs

RBsc

PUCCHshiftsoc

PUCCHoffset

PUCCHshifts

cellcs

scs

RBscscss

PUCCHshifts

PUCCHshifts

soc

NNnnnnlnn

NNnnnnlnnnn

Nnnn

Nnn

Nnnnn

s

s

δ

δ

πα

where

⎩⎨⎧

=

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧ Δ⋅<

=′

prefix cyclic extended2prefix cyclic normal3

otherwise if

RBsc

PUCCHshift

(1)cs

(1)PUCCH

(1)cs

c

NNcnNN

The resource indices within the two resource blocks in the two slots of a subframe to which the PUCCH is mapped are given by

( ) ( )⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

Δ⋅Δ⋅−Δ⋅<

=′otherwisemod

if)( PUCCHshift

RBsc

PUCCHshift

(1)cs

)1(PUCCH

PUCCHshift

(1)cs

)1(PUCCH

)1(PUCCH

s NcNcnNcnnnn

for 02mods =n and by

( )[ ] ( )⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−′

Δ⋅≥−+Δ+−′=′

otherwise)1(

andprefix cyclic normalfor 113mod1)1(3)(

s

PUCCHshift

(1)cs

)1(PUCCH

PUCCHshift

RBscs

s nn

NcnNnnnn

for 12mods =n .

The quantities

{ }{ }{ }1,...,1,0

prefix cyclic extendedfor 3,2prefix cyclic normalfor 3,2],1[

PUCCHshift

PUCCHoffset

PUCCHshift

−Δ∈

⎩⎨⎧

∈Δ

δ

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)17Release 8

are set by higher layers.

Table 5.4.1-1: Orthogonal sequences [ ])1()0( PUCCHSF −Nww for PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b.

Sequence index )( soc nn Orthogonal sequences [ ])1()0( PUCCHSF −Nww

0 [ ]1111 ++++ 1 [ ]1111 −+−+ 2 [ ]1111 +−−+

5.4.2 PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b The block of bits )1(),...,0( bit −Mbb shall be scrambled with a UE-specific scrambling sequence, resulting in a block of

scrambled bits )1(~

),...,0(~

bit −Mbb according to

( ) 2mod)()()(~

icibib +=


with ⎣ ⎦ cellID

9s

14RNTIinit 222 Nnnc +⋅+⋅= at the start of each subframe.


),...,0(~

bb shall be QPSK modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols )9(),...,0( dd .

Each complex-valued symbol )9(),...,0( dd shall be multiplied with a cyclically shifted length 12PUCCHseq =N sequence

)()(, nr vuα according to

1,...,1,0

9,...,1,0

)()()(

RBsc

)(,

PUCCHseq

−=

=

⋅=+⋅

Ni

n

irndinNz vuα

where )()(, ir vuα is defined by section 5.5.1 with PUCCH

seqRSsc NM = .

Resources used for transmission of PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b are identified by a resource index (2)PUCCHn from which the

cyclic shift α is determined according to

RBscscss )(2)( Nnnn ⋅= πα

where

( )( )⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

+++<+

=otherwisemod1),(

ifmod),()( RBsc

(2)RB

(2)PUCCH

cellcs

(2)RB

RBsc

)2(PUCCH

RBsc

(2)PUCCH

cellcs

scs NNnlnnNNnNnlnnnn

s

s

for 02mods =n and by

( )[ ] ( )⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−<−++−

=otherwise)1(

if11mod1)1()(scs

(2)RB

RBsc

)2(PUCCH

RBscscs

RBsc

scs nnNNnNnnNnn

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)18Release 8

for 12mods =n .

For PUCCH formats 2a and 2b, supported for normal cyclic prefix only, the bit(s) )1(),...,20( bit −Mbb shall be modulated as described in Table 5.4.2-1 resulting in a single modulation symbol )10(d used in the generation of the reference-signal for PUCCH format 2a and 2b as described in Section 5.5.2.2.1.

Table 5.4.2-1: Modulation symbol )10(d for PUCCH formats 2a and 2b.

PUCCH format )1(),...,20( bit −Mbb )10(d0 1− 2a 1 1

00 1− 01 j

10 j− 2b

11 1

5.4.3 Mapping to physical resources The block of complex-valued symbols )(iz shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor PUCCHβ and mapped in sequence starting with )0(z to resource elements. PUCCH uses one resource block in each of the two slots in a subframe. Within the physical resource block used for transmission, the mapping of )(iz to resource elements ( )lk, not used for transmission of reference signals shall be in increasing order of first k , then l and finally the slot number, starting with the first slot in the subframe.

The physical resource blocks to be used for transmission of PUCCH in slot sn is given by

( )

( )⎪⎪⎩

⎪⎪⎨

⎧

=+⎥⎦⎥

⎢⎣⎢−−

=+⎥⎦⎥

⎢⎣⎢

=

12mod2mod if2

1

02mod2mod if2

sULRB

s

PRB

nmmN

nmm

n

where the variable m depends on the PUCCH format. For formats 1, 1a and 1b

⎩⎨⎧

=

⎪⎪⎩

⎪⎪⎨

⎧

++⎥⎥⎦

⎥

⎢⎢⎣

⎢

Δ⋅

Δ⋅−

Δ⋅<

=


otherwise1

if

(2)RBPUCCH

shiftRBsc

PUCCHshift

(1)cs

(1)PUCCH

PUCCHshift

(1)cs

(1)PUCCH

(2)RB

c

NNc

Ncn

NcnN

m

and for formats 2, 2a and 2b

⎣ ⎦RBsc

(2)PUCCH Nnm =

Mapping of modulation symbols for the physical uplink control channel is illustrated in Figure 5.4.3-1.

In case of simultaneous transmission of sounding reference signal and PUCCH format 1a or 1b, one SC-FDMA symbol on PUCCH shall punctured.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)19Release 8

0=m

0=m1=m

1=m2=m

2=m3=m

3=m

One subframe

0PRB =n

1ULRBPRB −= Nn

Figure 5.4.3-1: Mapping to physical resource blocks for PUCCH.

5.5 Reference signals Two types of uplink reference signals are supported:

- Demodulation reference signal, associated with transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH

- Sounding reference signal, not associated with transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH

The same set of base sequences is used for demodulation and sounding reference signals.

5.5.1 Generation of the reference signal sequence

Reference signal sequence )()(, nr vuα is defined by a cyclic shift α of a base sequence )(, nr vu according to

RSsc,

)(, 0),()( Mnnrenr vu

njvu <≤= αα

where RBsc

RSsc mNM = is the length of the reference signal sequence and ULmax,

RB1 Nm ≤≤ . Multiple reference signal sequences are defined from a single base sequence through different values of α .

Base sequences )(, nr vu are divided into groups, where { }29,...,1,0∈u is the group number and v is the base sequence

number within the group, such that each group contains one base sequence ( 0=v ) of each length RBsc

RSsc mNM = ,

51 ≤≤ m and two base sequences ( 1,0=v ) of each length RBsc

RSsc mNM = , ULmax,

RB6 Nm ≤≤ . The sequence group number u and the number v within the group may vary in time as described in Sections 5.5.1.3 and 5.5.1.4, respectively.The definition of the base sequence )1(),...,0( RS

sc,, −Mrr vuvu depends on the sequence length RSscM .

5.5.1.1 Base sequences of length RBsc3N or larger

For RBsc

RSsc 3NM ≥ , the base sequence )1(),...,0( RS

sc,, −Mrr vuvu is given by

RSsc

RSZC, 0),mod()( MnNnxnr qvu <≤=

where the thq root Zadoff-Chu sequence is defined by

( ) 10, RSZC

)1(RSZC −≤≤=+

−

Nmemx Nmqmj

q

π

with q given by

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)20Release 8

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

31)1(

)1(21RSZC

2

+⋅=

−⋅++=

uNq

vqq q

The length RSZCN of the Zadoff-Chu sequence is given by the largest prime number such that RS

scRSZC MN < .

5.5.1.2 Base sequences of length less than RBsc3N

For RBsc

RSsc NM = and RB

scRSsc 2NM = , base sequence is given by

10,)( RSsc

4)(, −≤≤= Mnenr njvu

πϕ

where the value of )(nϕ is given by Table 5.5.1.2-1 and Table 5.5.1.2-2 for RBsc

RSsc NM = and RB

scRSsc 2NM = ,

respectively.

Table 5.5.1.2-1: Definition of )(nϕ for RBsc

RSsc NM = .

u )11(),...,0( ϕϕ 0 -1 1 3 -3 3 3 1 1 3 1 -3 31 1 1 3 3 3 -1 1 -3 -3 1 -3 32 1 1 -3 -3 -3 -1 -3 -3 1 -3 1 -13 -1 1 1 1 1 -1 -3 -3 1 -3 3 -14 -1 3 1 -1 1 -1 -3 -1 1 -1 1 35 1 -3 3 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 3 -3 16 -1 3 -3 -3 -3 3 1 -1 3 3 -3 17 -3 -1 -1 -1 1 -3 3 -1 1 -3 3 18 1 -3 3 1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 3 -1 19 1 -3 -1 3 3 -1 -3 1 1 1 1 1

10 -1 3 -1 1 1 -3 -3 -1 -3 -3 3 -111 3 1 -1 -1 3 3 -3 1 3 1 3 312 1 -3 1 1 -3 1 1 1 -3 -3 -3 113 3 3 -3 3 -3 1 1 3 -1 -3 3 314 -3 1 -1 -3 -1 3 1 3 3 3 -1 115 3 -1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 1 3 1 -1 -316 1 3 1 -1 1 3 3 3 -1 -1 3 -117 -3 1 1 3 -3 3 -3 -3 3 1 3 -118 -3 3 1 1 -3 1 -3 -3 -1 -1 1 -319 -1 3 1 3 1 -1 -1 3 -3 -1 -3 -120 -1 -3 1 1 1 1 3 1 -1 1 -3 -121 -1 3 -1 1 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 1 -1 -322 1 1 -3 -3 -3 -3 -1 3 -3 1 -3 323 1 1 -1 -3 -1 -3 1 -1 1 3 -1 124 1 1 3 1 3 3 -1 1 -1 -3 -3 125 1 -3 3 3 1 3 3 1 -3 -1 -1 326 1 3 -3 -3 3 -3 1 -1 -1 3 -1 -327 -3 -1 -3 -1 -3 3 1 -1 1 3 -3 -328 -1 3 -3 3 -1 3 3 -3 3 3 -1 -129 3 -3 -3 -1 -1 -3 -1 3 -3 3 1 -1

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)21Release 8

Table 5.5.1.2-2: Definition of )(nϕ for RBsc

RSsc 2NM = .

u )23(),...,0( ϕϕ 0 -1 3 1 -3 3 -1 1 3 -3 3 1 3 -3 3 1 1 -1 1 3 -3 3 -3 -1 -31 -3 3 -3 -3 -3 1 -3 -3 3 -1 1 1 1 3 1 -1 3 -3 -3 1 3 1 1 -32 3 -1 3 3 1 1 -3 3 3 3 3 1 -1 3 -1 1 1 -1 -3 -1 -1 1 3 33 -1 -3 1 1 3 -3 1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 3 1 3 1 -1 3 1 1 -3 -1 -3 -14 -1 -1 -1 -3 -3 -1 1 1 3 3 -1 3 -1 1 -1 -3 1 -1 -3 -3 1 -3 -1 -15 -3 1 1 3 -1 1 3 1 -3 1 -3 1 1 -1 -1 3 -1 -3 3 -3 -3 -3 1 16 1 1 -1 -1 3 -3 -3 3 -3 1 -1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 -3 -1 1 -1 3 -1 -37 -3 3 3 -1 -1 -3 -1 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 -1 1 3 -3 -1 -1 18 -3 1 3 -3 1 -1 -3 3 -3 3 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 -3 -3 -3 1 -3 -3 -3 1 -39 1 1 -3 3 3 -1 -3 -1 3 -3 3 3 3 -1 1 1 -3 1 -1 1 1 -3 1 110 -1 1 -3 -3 3 -1 3 -1 -1 -3 -3 -3 -1 -3 -3 1 -1 1 3 3 -1 1 -1 311 1 3 3 -3 -3 1 3 1 -1 -3 -3 -3 3 3 -3 3 3 -1 -3 3 -1 1 -3 112 1 3 3 1 1 1 -1 -1 1 -3 3 -1 1 1 -3 3 3 -1 -3 3 -3 -1 -3 -113 3 -1 -1 -1 -1 -3 -1 3 3 1 -1 1 3 3 3 -1 1 1 -3 1 3 -1 -3 314 -3 -3 3 1 3 1 -3 3 1 3 1 1 3 3 -1 -1 -3 1 -3 -1 3 1 1 315 -1 -1 1 -3 1 3 -3 1 -1 -3 -1 3 1 3 1 -1 -3 -3 -1 -1 -3 -3 -3 -116 -1 -3 3 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -3 3 1 3 3 1 -1 1 -3 1 -3 1 1 -3 -117 1 3 -1 3 3 -1 -3 1 -1 -3 3 3 3 -1 1 1 3 -1 -3 -1 3 -1 -1 -118 1 1 1 1 1 -1 3 -1 -3 1 1 3 -3 1 -3 -1 1 1 -3 -3 3 1 1 -319 1 3 3 1 -1 -3 3 -1 3 3 3 -3 1 -1 1 -1 -3 -1 1 3 -1 3 -3 -320 -1 -3 3 -3 -3 -3 -1 -1 -3 -1 -3 3 1 3 -3 -1 3 -1 1 -1 3 -3 1 -121 -3 -3 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 3 1 -3 -1 1 -1 1 -1 -1 3 3 -3 -1 1 -322 -3 -1 -3 3 1 -1 -3 -1 -3 -3 3 -3 3 -3 -1 1 3 1 -3 1 3 3 -1 -323 -1 -1 -1 -1 3 3 3 1 3 3 -3 1 3 -1 3 -1 3 3 -3 3 1 -1 3 324 1 -1 3 3 -1 -3 3 -3 -1 -1 3 -1 3 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -3 -1 325 1 -1 1 -1 3 -1 3 1 1 -1 -1 -3 1 1 -3 1 3 -3 1 1 -3 -3 -1 -126 -3 -1 1 3 1 1 -3 -1 -1 -3 3 -3 3 1 -3 3 -3 1 -1 1 -3 1 1 127 -1 -3 3 3 1 1 3 -1 -3 -1 -1 -1 3 1 -3 -3 -1 3 -3 -1 -3 -1 -3 -128 -1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -1 -3 1 1 -3 1 -3 -3 3 1 1 -1 3 -1 -129 1 1 -1 -1 -3 -1 3 -1 3 -1 1 3 1 -1 3 1 3 -3 -3 1 -1 -1 1 3

5.5.1.3 Group hopping

The sequence-group number u in slot sn is defined by a group hopping pattern )( sgh nf and a sequence-shift pattern

)( sss nf according to

( ) 30mod)()( ssssgh nfnfu +=

There are 17 different hopping patterns and 30 different sequence-shift patterns. Sequence-group hopping can be enabled or disabled by higher layers. PUCCH and PUSCH have the same hopping pattern but may have different sequence-shift patterns.

The group-hopping pattern )( sgh nf is the same for PUSCH and PUCCH and given by

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

⎟⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ ⋅+= ∑ =

enabled is hopping group if30mod2)5(

disabled is hopping group if0)( 4

0 ssgh

iiincnf

where the pseudo-random sequence )(ic is defined by section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be


The sequence-shift pattern )( sss nf definition differs between PUCCH and PUSCH.

For PUCCH, the sequence-shift pattern )( sPUCCH

ss nf is derived from the physical-layer cell identity.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)22Release 8

For PUSCH, the sequence-shift pattern )( sPUSCH

ss nf is given by ( ) 30mod)()( sssPUCCH

sssPUSCH

ss Δ+= nfnf , where { }29,...,1,0ss ∈Δ is configured by higher layers.

5.5.1.4 Sequence hopping

Sequence hopping only applies for reference-signals of length RBsc

RSsc 6NM ≥ .

For reference-signals of length RBsc

RSsc 6NM < , the base sequence number v within the base sequence group is given by

0=v .

For reference-signals of length RBsc

RSsc 6NM ≥ , the base sequence number v within the base sequence group is defined

by

⎩⎨⎧

=otherwise0

enabled is hopping sequence and disabled is hopping group if)(icv

where the pseudo-random sequence )(ic is given by section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be


5.5.2 Demodulation reference signal

5.5.2.1 Demodulation reference signal for PUSCH

5.5.2.1.1 Reference signal sequence

The demodulation reference signal sequence ( )⋅PUSCHr for PUSCH is defined by

( ) ( )nrnMmr vu)(

,RSsc

PUSCH α=+⋅

where

1,...,0

1,0RSsc −=

=

Mn

m

and

PUSCHsc

RSsc MM =

Section 5.5.1 defines the sequence )1(),...,0( RSsc

)(,

)(, −Mrr vuvu

αα .

The cyclic shift α in a slot is given by Table 5.5.2.1.1-1 with

( ) RSshiftPRSDMRScs mod Nnnn +=

where RSshiftN is the number of shifts available in the cell, DMRSn is included in the uplink scheduling grant in case of

multiple shifts within the cell and PRSn is given by the pseudo-random sequence )(ic is defined by section 7.2. The

pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialized with ( )cellIDinit Nfc = at the beginning of each radio frame.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)23Release 8

Table 5.5.2.1.1-1: Demodulation reference signal cyclic shift for PUSCH.

csn α0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

5.5.2.1.2 Mapping to physical resources

The sequence ( )⋅PUSCHr shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor PUSCHβ and mapped in sequence starting

with )0(PUSCHr to the same set of physical resource blocks used for the corresponding PUSCH transmission defined in Section 5.3.4. The mapping to resource elements ),( lk with 3=l in the subframe shall be in increasing order of first k , then the slot number.

5.5.2.2 Demodulation reference signal for PUCCH

5.5.2.2.1 Reference signal sequence

The demodulation reference signal sequence ( )⋅PUCCHr for PUCCH is defined by

( ) ( )nrmzmwnmMMNmr vu)(

,RSsc

RSsc

PUCCHRS

PUCCH )()(' α=++

where

1,0'1,...,0

1,...,0RSsc

PUCCHRS

=−=

−=

mMn

Nm

For PUCCH format 2a and 2b, )(mz equals )10(d for 1=m , where )10(d is defined in Section 5.4.2. For all other cases, .1)( =mz

The sequence )()(, nr vuα is given by Section 5.5.1 with 12RS

sc =M where the expression for the cyclic shift α is determined by the PUCCH format.

For PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b, )( snα is given by

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦

( )( )[ ]( )[ ]⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

′++Δ⋅′+

′Δ++Δ⋅′+=

⋅=

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

′Δ⋅′⋅

′Δ⋅′=

prefix cyclic extendedfor modmod)()(),(

prefix cyclic normalfor modmodmod)()(),()(

)(2)(

prefix cyclic extendedfor )(2

prefix cyclic normalfor )()(

RBscsoc

PUCCHoffset

PUCCHshifts

cellcs

RBsc

PUCCHshiftsoc

PUCCHoffset

PUCCHshifts

cellcs

scs

RBscscss

PUCCHshifts

PUCCHshifts

soc

NNnnnnlnn

NNnnnnlnnnn

Nnnn

Nnn

Nnnnn

s

s

δ

δ

πα

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)24Release 8

where )( snn′ , N ′ , PUCCHshiftΔ , PUCCH

offsetδ and ),(cellcs lnn s are defined by Section 5.4.1. The number of reference symbols

per slot PUCCHRSN and the sequence )(nw are given by Table 5.5.2.2.1-1 and 5.5.2.2.1-2, respectively.

For PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b, )( snα is defined by Section 5.4.2. The number of reference symbols per slot PUCCHRSN and the sequence )(nw are given by Table 5.5.2.2.1-1 and 5.5.2.2.1-3, respectively.

Table 5.5.2.2.1-1: Number of PUCCH demodulation reference symbols per slot PUCCHRSN .

PUCCH format Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix 1, 1a, 1b 3 2

2 2 1 2a, 2b 2 N/A

Table 5.5.2.2.1-2: Orthogonal sequences [ ])1()0( PUCCHRS −Nww for PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b.

Sequence index )( soc nn Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix

0 [ ]111 [ ]11

1 [ ]34321 ππ jj ee [ ]11 −

2 [ ]32341 ππ jj ee N/A

Table 5.5.2.2.1-3: Orthogonal sequences [ ])1()0( PUCCHRS −Nww for PUCCH formats 2, 2a, 2b.

Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix[ ]11 [ ]1

5.5.2.2.2 Mapping to physical resources

The sequence ( )⋅PUCCHr shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor PUCCHβ and mapped in sequence starting

with )0(PUCCHr to resource elements ),( lk . The mapping shall be in increasing order of first k , then l and finally the slot number. The same set of values for k as for the corresponding PUCCH transmission shall be used. The values of the symbol index l in a slot are given by Table 5.5.2.2.2-1.

Table 5.5.2.2.2-1: Demodulation reference signal location for different PUCCH formats

Set of values for l PUCCH format Normal cyclic prefix Extended cyclic prefix

1, 1a, 1b 2, 3, 4 2, 3 2, 2a, 2b 1, 5 3

5.5.3 Sounding reference signal The sounding reference signal is not transmitted simultaneously with PUCCH format 1. PUCCH format 1 takes precedence over the sounding reference signal in case their respective configurations cause an overlap in time.

5.5.3.1 Sequence generation

The sounding reference signal sequence ( ) ( )nrnr vu)(

,SRS α= is defined by Section 5.5.1. The sequence index to use is

derived from the PUCCH base sequence index.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)25Release 8

5.5.3.2 Mapping to physical resources

The sequence )1(),...,0( RSsc

SRSSRS −Mrr shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor SRSβ and mapped in

sequence starting with )0(SRSr to resource elements ),( lk according to

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧ −=

=+ otherwise01,...,1,0)( RS

scSRS

SRS,2 0

Mkkra lkkβ

where 0k is the frequency-domain starting position of the sounding reference signal and RSscM is the length of the

sounding reference signal sequence.

5.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation This section applies to all uplink physical signals and physical channels except the physical random access channel.

The time-continuous signal ( )tsl in SC-FDMA symbol l in an uplink slot is defined by

( ) ( ) ( )

⎣ ⎦

⎡ ⎤∑

−

−=

−Δ+⋅= −

12/

2/

212,

RBsc

ULRB

RBsc

ULRB

s,CP)(

NN

NNk

TNtfkjlkl

leats π

for ( ) s,CP0 TNNt l ×+<≤ where ⎣ ⎦2)( RBsc

ULRB NNkk +=− , 2048=N , kHz 15=Δf and lka , is the content of resource

element ( )lk, .

The SC-FDMA symbols in a slot shall be transmitted in increasing order of l , starting with 0=l , where SC-FDMA

symbol 0>l starts at time ∑ −

=′ ′ +1

0 s,CP )(l

l l TNN within the slot.

Table 5.6-1lists the values of lN ,CP that shall be used. Note that different SC-FDMA symbols within a slot may have different cyclic prefix lengths.

Table 5.6-1: SC-FDMA parameters.

Configuration Cyclic prefix length lN ,CP

Normal cyclic prefix 0for 160 =l

6,...,2,1for 144 =l Extended cyclic prefix 5,...,1,0for 512 =l

5.7 Physical random access channel

5.7.1 Time and frequency structure The physical layer random access preamble, illustrated in Figure 5.7.1-1, consists of a cyclic prefix of length CPT and a sequence part of length SEQT . The parameter values are listed in Table 5.7.1-1 and depend on the frame structure and the random access configuration. Higher layers control the preamble format.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)26Release 8

CPT SEQT

Figure 5.7.1-1: Random access preamble format.

Table 5.7.1-1: Random access preamble parameters.

Preamble format CPT SEQT 0 s3168 T⋅ s24576 T⋅ 1 s21024 T⋅ s24576 T⋅ 2 s6240 T⋅ s245762 T⋅⋅ 3 s21024 T⋅ s245762 T⋅⋅ 4

(frame structure type 2 only) s448 T⋅ s4096 T⋅

The transmission of a random access preamble, if triggered by the MAC layer, is restricted to certain time and frequency resources. These resources are enumerated in increasing order of the subframe number within the radio frame and the physical resource blocks in the frequency domain such that index 0 correspond to the lowest numbered physical resource block and subframe within the radio frame.

For preamble format 0-3, there is at most one random access resource per subframe for FDD. Table 5.7.1-2 lists the subframes in which random access preamble transmission is allowed for a given configuration. The start of the random access preamble shall be aligned with the start of the corresponding uplink subframe at the UE assuming a timing advance of zero. For PRACH configuration 0, 1, 2, 15, the UE may for handover purposes assume an absolute value of the relative time difference between radio frame i in the current cell and the target cell of less than s153600 T⋅ .

Table 5.7.1-2: Random access preamble timing for preamble format 0-3.

PRACH configuration System frame number Subframe number 0 Even 1 1 Even 4 2 Even 7 3 Any 1 4 Any 4 5 Any 7 6 Any 1, 6 7 Any 2 ,7 8 Any 3, 8 9 Any 1, 4, 7

10 Any 2, 5, 8 11 Any 3, 6, 9 12 Any 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 13 Any 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 14 Any 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 15 Even 9

For preamble format 4 available in TDD only, the preamble shall start s4832 T⋅ before the end of the UpPTS at the UE.

In the frequency domain, the random access preamble occupies a bandwidth corresponding to 6 resource blocks for both frame structures.

5.7.2 Preamble sequence generation The random access preambles are generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences with zero correlation zone, generated from one or several root Zadoff-Chu sequences. The network configures the set of preamble sequences the UE is allowed to use.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)27Release 8

There are 64 preambles available in each cell. The set of 64 preamble sequences in a cell is found by including first, in the order of increasing cyclic shift, all the available cyclic shifts of a root Zadoff-Chu sequence with the logical index RACH_ROOT_SEQUENCE, where RACH_ROOT_SEQUENCE is broadcasted as part of the System Information. Additional preamble sequences, in case 64 preambles cannot be generated from a single root Zadoff-Chu sequence, are obtained from the root sequences with the consecutive logical indexes until all the 64 sequences are found. The logical root sequence order is cyclic: the logical index 0 is consecutive to 837. The relation between a logical root sequence index and physical root sequence index u is given by Tables 5.7.2-4 and 5.7.2-5 for preamble formats 0 – 3 and 4, respectively.

The thu root Zadoff-Chu sequence is defined by

( ) 10, ZC

)1(

ZC −≤≤=+

−Nnenx N

nunj

u

π

where the length ZCN of the Zadoff-Chu sequence is given by Table 5.7.2-1. From the thu root Zadoff-Chu sequence, random access preambles with zero correlation zones of length 1CS −N are defined by cyclic shifts according to

)mod)(()( ZC, NCnxnx vuvu +=

where the cyclic shift is given by

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−+=+

−==

sets restrictedfor 1,...,1,0)mod(

sets edunrestrictfor 10,1,...,RAshift

RAgroup

RAshiftCS

RAshift

RAshiftstart

CSZCCS

nnnvNnvnvd

NNvvNCv

and CSN is given by Tables 5.7.2-2 and 5.7.2-3 for preamble formats 0-3 and 4, respectively.

The variable ud is the cyclic shift corresponding to a Doppler shift of magnitude SEQ1 T and is given by

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−<≤

= −

−−

otherwisemod2mod0mod

ZC1

ZC

ZCZC1

ZC1

NuNNNuNudu

The parameters for restricted sets of cyclic shifts depend on ud . For 3ZCCS NdN u <≤ , the parameters are given by

⎣ ⎦

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦( )0,)2(max

2

CSstartRAgroupZC

RAshift

startZCRAgroup

CSRAshiftstart

CSRAshift

NdndNn

dNn

Nndd

Ndn

u

u

u

−−=

=

+=

=

For 2)(3 CSZCZC NNdN u −≤≤ , the parameters are given by

⎣ ⎦

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦( )( )RA

shiftCSstartRAgroup

RAshift

startRAgroup

CSRAshiftZCstart

CSZCRAshift

,0,)(maxmin

2

)2(

nNdndn

ddn

NndNd

NdNn

u

u

u

u

−=

=

+−=

−=

For all other values of ud , there are no cyclic shifts in the restricted set.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)28Release 8

Table 5.7.2-1: Random access preamble sequence length.

Preamble format ZCN

0 – 3 839 4 139

Table 5.7.2-2: Cyclic shifts CSN for preamble generation (preamble formats 0-3).

CSN value CSN configuration Unrestricted set Restricted set

0 0 15 1 13 18 2 15 22 3 18 26 4 22 32 5 26 38 6 32 46 7 38 55 8 46 68 9 59 82

10 76 100 11 93 128 12 119 158 13 167 202 14 279 237 15 419 -

Table 5.7.2-3: Cyclic shifts CSN for preamble generation (preamble format 4).

CSN configuration

CSN value

0 2 1 4 2 6 3 8 4 10 5 12 6 15

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)29Release 8

Table 5.7.2-4: Root Zadoff-Chu sequence order for preamble formats 0 – 3.

Logical root sequence number

Physical root sequence number u (in increasing order of the corresponding logical sequence number)

0–23 129, 710, 140, 699, 120, 719, 210, 629, 168, 671, 84, 755, 105, 734, 93, 746, 70, 769, 60, 779 2, 837, 1, 838

24–29 56, 783, 112, 727, 148, 691 30–35 80, 759, 42, 797, 40, 799 36–41 35, 804, 73, 766, 146, 693 42–51 31, 808, 28, 811, 30, 809, 27, 812, 29, 810 52–63 24, 815, 48, 791, 68, 771, 74, 765, 178, 661, 136, 703 64–75 86, 753, 78, 761, 43, 796, 39, 800, 20, 819, 21, 818 76–89 95, 744, 202, 637, 190, 649, 181, 658, 137, 702, 125, 714, 151, 688 90–115 217, 622, 128, 711, 142, 697, 122, 717, 203, 636, 118, 721, 110, 729, 89, 750, 103, 736, 61,

778, 55, 784, 15, 824, 14, 825 116–135 12, 827, 23, 816, 34, 805, 37, 802, 46, 793, 207, 632, 179, 660, 145, 694, 130, 709, 223, 616 136–167 228, 611, 227, 612, 132, 707, 133, 706, 143, 696, 135, 704, 161, 678, 201, 638, 173, 666, 106,

733, 83, 756, 91, 748, 66, 773, 53, 786, 10, 829, 9, 830 168–203 7, 832, 8, 831, 16, 823, 47, 792, 64, 775, 57, 782, 104, 735, 101, 738, 108, 731, 208, 631, 184,

655, 197, 642, 191, 648, 121, 718, 141, 698, 149, 690, 216, 623, 218, 621 204–263 152, 687, 144, 695, 134, 705, 138, 701, 199, 640, 162, 677, 176, 663, 119, 720, 158, 681, 164,

675, 174, 665, 171, 668, 170, 669, 87, 752, 169, 670, 88, 751, 107, 732, 81, 758, 82, 757, 100, 739, 98, 741, 71, 768, 59, 780, 65, 774, 50, 789, 49, 790, 26, 813, 17, 822, 13, 826, 6, 833

264–327 5, 834, 33, 806, 51, 788, 75, 764, 99, 740, 96, 743, 97, 742, 166, 673, 172, 667, 175, 664, 187, 652, 163, 676, 185, 654, 200, 639, 114, 725, 189, 650, 115, 724, 194, 645, 195, 644, 192, 647, 182, 657, 157, 682, 156, 683, 211, 628, 154, 685, 123, 716, 139, 700, 212, 627, 153, 686, 213, 626, 215, 624, 150, 689

328–383 225, 614, 224, 615, 221, 618, 220, 619, 127, 712, 147, 692, 124, 715, 193, 646, 205, 634, 206, 633, 116, 723, 160, 679, 186, 653, 167, 672, 79, 760, 85, 754, 77, 762, 92, 747, 58, 781, 62, 777, 69, 770, 54, 785, 36, 803, 32, 807, 25, 814, 18, 821, 11, 828, 4, 835

384–455 3, 836, 19, 820, 22, 817, 41, 798, 38, 801, 44, 795, 52, 787, 45, 794, 63, 776, 67, 772, 72 767, 76, 763, 94, 745, 102, 737, 90, 749, 109, 730, 165, 674, 111, 728, 209, 630, 204, 635, 117, 722, 188, 651, 159, 680, 198, 641, 113, 726, 183, 656, 180, 659, 177, 662, 196, 643, 155, 684, 214, 625, 126, 713, 131, 708, 219, 620, 222, 617, 226, 613

456–513 230, 609, 232, 607, 262, 577, 252, 587, 418, 421, 416, 423, 413, 426, 411, 428, 376, 463, 395, 444, 283, 556, 285, 554, 379, 460, 390, 449, 363, 476, 384, 455, 388, 451, 386, 453, 361, 478, 387, 452, 360, 479, 310, 529, 354, 485, 328, 511, 315, 524, 337, 502, 349, 490, 335, 504, 324, 515

514–561 323, 516, 320, 519, 334, 505, 359, 480, 295, 544, 385, 454, 292, 547, 291, 548, 381, 458, 399, 440, 380, 459, 397, 442, 369, 470, 377, 462, 410, 429, 407, 432, 281, 558, 414, 425, 247, 592, 277, 562, 271, 568, 272, 567, 264, 575, 259, 580

562–629 237, 602, 239, 600, 244, 595, 243, 596, 275, 564, 278, 561, 250, 589, 246, 593, 417, 422, 248, 591, 394, 445, 393, 446, 370, 469, 365, 474, 300, 539, 299, 540, 364, 475, 362, 477, 298, 541, 312, 527, 313, 526, 314, 525, 353, 486, 352, 487, 343, 496, 327, 512, 350, 489, 326, 513, 319, 520, 332, 507, 333, 506, 348, 491, 347, 492, 322, 517

630–659 330, 509, 338, 501, 341, 498, 340, 499, 342, 497, 301, 538, 366, 473, 401, 438, 371, 468, 408, 431, 375, 464, 249, 590, 269, 570, 238, 601, 234, 605

660–707 257, 582, 273, 566, 255, 584, 254, 585, 245, 594, 251, 588, 412, 427, 372, 467, 282, 557, 403, 436, 396, 443, 392, 447, 391, 448, 382, 457, 389, 450, 294, 545, 297, 542, 311, 528, 344, 495, 345, 494, 318, 521, 331, 508, 325, 514, 321, 518

708–729 346, 493, 339, 500, 351, 488, 306, 533, 289, 550, 400, 439, 378, 461, 374, 465, 415, 424, 270, 569, 241, 598

730–751 231, 608, 260, 579, 268, 571, 276, 563, 409, 430, 398, 441, 290, 549, 304, 535, 308, 531, 358, 481, 316, 523

752–765 293, 546, 288, 551, 284, 555, 368, 471, 253, 586, 256, 583, 263, 576 766–777 242, 597, 274, 565, 402, 437, 383, 456, 357, 482, 329, 510 778–789 317, 522, 307, 532, 286, 553, 287, 552, 266, 573, 261, 578 790–795 236, 603, 303, 536, 356, 483 796–803 355, 484, 405, 434, 404, 435, 406, 433 804–809 235, 604, 267, 572, 302, 537 810–815 309, 530, 265, 574, 233, 606 816–819 367, 472, 296, 543 820–837 336, 503, 305, 534, 373, 466, 280, 559, 279, 560, 419, 420, 240, 599, 258, 581, 229, 610

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)30Release 8

Table 5.7.2-5: Root Zadoff-Chu sequence order for preamble format 4.

Logical root

sequence number

Physical root sequence number u (in increasing order of the corresponding logical sequence number)

0 – 19 1 138 2 137 3 136 4 135 5 134 6 133 7 132 8 131 9 130 10 12920 – 39 11 128 12 127 13 126 14 125 15 124 16 123 17 122 18 121 19 120 20 11940 – 59 21 118 22 117 23 116 24 115 25 114 26 113 27 112 28 111 29 110 30 10960 – 79 31 108 32 107 33 106 34 105 35 104 36 103 37 102 38 101 39 100 40 9980 – 99 41 98 42 97 43 96 44 95 45 94 46 93 47 92 48 91 49 90 50 89100 – 119 51 88 52 87 53 86 54 85 55 84 56 83 57 82 58 81 59 80 60 79120 – 137 61 78 62 77 63 76 64 75 65 74 66 73 67 72 68 71 69 70 - -

5.7.3 Baseband signal generation The time-continuous random access signal )(ts is defined by

( ) ( )( ) ( )∑ ∑−

=

−Δ+++−

=

−⋅⋅=

1

0

21

0

2

,PRACH

ZCCPRA2

10

ZCZC)(

N

k

TtfkKkjN

n

Nnkj

vu eenxts ϕππ

β

where CPSEQ0 TTt +<≤ , PRACHβ is an amplitude scaling factor and 2RBsc

ULRB

RBscRA0 NNNkk −= . The location in the

frequency domain is controlled by the parameter RAk , expressed as a physical resource block number configured by

higher layers and fulfilling 60 ULRBRA −≤≤ Nk . The factor RAffK ΔΔ= accounts for the difference in subcarrier

spacing between the random access preamble and uplink data transmission. The variable RAfΔ , the subcarrier spacing for the random access preamble, and the variableϕ , a fixed offset determining the frequency-domain location of the random access preamble within the physical resource blocks, are both given by Table 5.7.3-1.

Table 5.7.3-1: Random access baseband parameters.

Preamble format RAfΔ ϕ

0 – 3 1250 Hz 7 4 7500 Hz 2

5.8 Modulation and upconversion Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the complex-valued SC-FDMA baseband signal for each antenna port is shown in Figure 5.8-1. The filtering required prior to transmission is defined by the requirements in [6].

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)31Release 8

{ })(Re tsl

{ })(Im tsl

( )tf02cos π

( )tf02sin π−

)(tsl

Figure 5.8-1: Uplink modulation.

6 Downlink

6.1 Overview The smallest time-frequency unit for downlink transmission is denoted a resource element and is defined in Section 6.2.2.

6.1.1 Physical channels A downlink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information originating from higher layers and is the interface defined between 36.212 and 36.211. The following downlink physical channels are defined:

- Physical Downlink Shared Channel, PDSCH

- Physical Broadcast Channel, PBCH

- Physical Multicast Channel, PMCH

- Physical Control Format Indicator Channel, PCFICH

- Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH

- Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel, PHICH

6.1.2 Physical signals A downlink signal corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer but does not carry information originating from higher layers. The following downlink physical signals are defined:

- Reference signal

- Synchronization signal

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)32Release 8

6.2 Slot structure and physical resource elements

6.2.1 Resource grid

The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of RBsc

DLRB NN subcarriers and DL

symbN OFDM symbols.

The resource grid structure is illustrated in Figure 6.2.2-1. The quantity DLRBN depends on the downlink transmission

bandwidth configured in the cell and shall fulfil

DLmax,RB

DLRB

DLmin,RB NNN ≤≤

where 6DLmin,RB =N and 110DLmax,

RB =N are the smallest and largest downlink bandwidth, respectively, supported by the current version of this specification.

The set of allowed values for DLRBN is given by [6]. The number of OFDM symbols in a slot depends on the cyclic

prefix length and subcarrier spacing configured and is given in Table 6.2.3-1.

In case of multi-antenna transmission, there is one resource grid defined per antenna port. An antenna port is defined by its associated reference signal. The set of antenna ports supported depends on the reference signal configuration in the cell:

- Cell-specific reference signals, associated with non-MBSFN transmission, support a configuration of one, two, or four antenna ports and the antenna port number p shall fulfil 0=p , { }1,0∈p , and { }3,2,1,0∈p , respectively.

- MBSFN reference signals, associated with MBSFN transmission, are transmitted on antenna port 4=p .

- UE-specific reference signals are transmitted on antenna port 5=p .

6.2.2 Resource elements Each element in the resource grid for antenna port p is called a resource element and is uniquely identified by the

index pair ( )lk, in a slot where 1,...,0 RBsc

DLRB −= NNk and 1,...,0 DL

symb −= Nl are the indices in the frequency and time

domains, respectively. Resource element ( )lk, on antenna port p corresponds to the complex value )(,plka . When there

is no risk for confusion, or no particular antenna port is specified, the index p may be dropped.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)33Release 8

DLsymbN

slotT

0=l 1DLsymb −= Nl

RB

scD

LR

BN

N×

subc

arrie

rs

RB

scN

subc

arrie

rs

RBsc

DLsymb NN ×

),( lk

0=k

1RBsc

DLRB −= NNk

Figure 6.2.2-1: Downlink resource grid.

6.2.3 Resource blocks Resource blocks are used to describe the mapping of certain physical channels to resource elements.. Physical and virtual resource blocks are defined.

A physical resource block is defined as DLsymbN consecutive OFDM symbols in the time domain and RB

scN consecutive

subcarriers in the frequency domain, where DLsymbN and RB

scN are given by Table 6.2.3-1. A physical resource block thus

consists of RBsc

DLsymb NN × resource elements, corresponding to one slot in the time domain and 180 kHz in the frequency

domain.

Physical resource blocks are numbered from 0 to 1DLRB −N in the frequency domain. The relation between the physical

resource block number PRBn in the frequency domain and resource elements ),( lk in a slot is given by

⎥⎥⎦

⎥

⎢⎢⎣

⎢= RB

scPRB N

kn

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)34Release 8

Table 6.2.3-1: Physical resource blocks parameters.

Configuration RBscN DL

symbN

Normal cyclic prefix kHz 15=Δf 7 kHz 15=Δf

12 6

Extended cyclic prefix kHz 5.7=Δf 24 3

A virtual resource block is of the same size as a physical resource block. Virtual resource blocks are numbered from 0 to 1DL

RB −N . Two types of virtual resource blocks are defined:

- Virtual resource blocks of localized type

- Virtual resource blocks of distributed type

Virtual resource blocks of localized type are mapped directly to physical resource blocks such that virtual resource block VRBn corresponds to physical resource block VRBPRB nn = .

Virtual resource blocks of distributed type are mapped to physical resource blocks such that virtual resource block VRBn corresponds to physical resource block ),( sVRBPRB nnfn = , where sn is the slot number within a radio frame.

The virtual-to-physical resource block mapping is different in the two slots of a subframe.

6.2.4 Resource-element groups Resource-element groups are used for defining the mapping of control channels to resource elements.

A resource-element group is represented by the index pair ),( lk ′′ of the resource element with the lowest index k in the group with all resource elements in the group having the same value of l . The set of resource elements ),( lk in a resource-element group depends on the number of cell-specific reference signals configured as described below with

RBscPRB0 Nnk ⋅= , DL

RBPRB0 Nn <≤ .

- In the first OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe the two resource-element groups in physical resource block PRBn consist of resource elements )0,( =lk with 5 ,...,1 ,0 000 +++= kkkk and

11 ,...,7 ,6 000 +++= kkkk , respectively.

- In the second OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe in case of one or two cell-specific reference signals configured, the three resource-element groups in physical resource block PRBn consist of resource elements

)1,( =lk with 3 ,...,1 ,0 000 +++= kkkk , 7 ,...,5 ,4 000 +++= kkkk and 11 ,...,9 ,8 000 +++= kkkk , respectively.

- In the second OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe in case of four cell-specific reference signals configured, the two resource-element groups in physical resource block PRBn consist of resource elements

)1,( =lk with 5 ,...,1 ,0 000 +++= kkkk and 11 ,...,7 ,6 000 +++= kkkk , respectively.

- In the third OFDM symbol of the first slot in a subframe, the three resource-element groups in physical resource block PRBn consist of resource elements )2,( =lk with 3 ,...,1 ,0 000 +++= kkkk , 7 ,...,5 ,4 000 +++= kkkk and 11 ,...,9 ,8 000 +++= kkkk , respectively.

Mapping of a symbol-quadruplet )3(),2(),1(),( +++ iziziziz onto a resource-element group represented by resource-element ),( lk ′′ is defined such that elements )(iz are mapped to resource elements ),( lk of the resource-element group not used for cell-specific reference signals in increasing order of i and k . In case a single cell-specific reference signal is configured, cell-specific reference signals shall be assumed to be present on antenna ports 0 and 1 for the purpose of mapping a symbol-quadruplet to a resource-element group, otherwise the number of cell-specific reference signals shall be assumed equal to the actual number of antenna ports used for cell-specific reference signals.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)35Release 8

6.2.5 Guard period for half-duplex FDD operation For half-duplex FDD operation, a guard period is created by the UE by not receiving the last part of a downlink subframe immediately preceding an uplink subframe from the same UE.

6.2.6 Guard Period for TDD Operation For frame structure type 2, the GP field in Figure 4.2-1 serves as a guard period.

6.3 General structure for downlink physical channels This section describes a general structure, applicable to more than one physical channel.

The baseband signal representing a downlink physical channel is defined in terms of the following steps:

- scrambling of coded bits in each of the code words to be transmitted on a physical channel

- modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulation symbols

- mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers

- precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on each layer for transmission on the antenna ports

- mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for each antenna port to resource elements

- generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for each antenna port

Figure 6.3-1: Overview of physical channel processing.

6.3.1 Scrambling

For each code word q , the block of bits )1(),...,0( )(bit

)()( −qqq Mbb , where )(bitqM is the number of bits in code word q

transmitted on the physical channel in one subframe, shall be scrambled prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits )1(

~),...,0(

~ (q)bit

)()( −Mbb qq according to

( ) 2mod)()()(~

icibib qqq +=

where the scrambling sequence )(icq is given by Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised at the start of each subframe, where the initialisation value of initc depends on the transport channel type according to

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

+⋅+⋅+⋅+⋅

=PMCHfor 22PDSCHfor 2222

MBSFNID

9s

cellID

9s

1314RNTI

init NnNnqnc

where RNTIn corresponds to the identity of the UE(s) to which the PDSCH transmission is intended.

Up to two code words can be transmitted in one subframe, i.e., { }1,0∈q .

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)36Release 8

6.3.2 Modulation

For each code word q , the block of scrambled bits )1(~

),...,0(~ (q)

bit)()( −Mbb qq shall be modulated as described in

Section 7.1 using one of the modulation schemes in Table 6.3.2-1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols )1(),...,0( (q)

symb)()( −Mdd qq .

Table 6.3.2-1: Modulation schemes

Physical channel Modulation schemesPDSCH QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAMPMCH QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM

6.3.3 Layer mapping The complex-valued modulation symbols for each of the code words to be transmitted are mapped onto one or several layers. Complex-valued modulation symbols )1(),...,0( (q)

symb)()( −Mdd qq for code word q shall be mapped onto the

layers [ ]Tixixix )(...)()( )1()0( −= υ , 1,...,1,0 layersymb −= Mi where υ is the number of layers and layer

symbM is the number of modulation symbols per layer.

6.3.3.1 Layer mapping for transmission on a single antenna port

For transmission on a single antenna port, a single layer is used, 1=υ , and the mapping is defined by

)()( )0()0( idix =

with (0)symb

layersymb MM = .

6.3.3.2 Layer mapping for spatial multiplexing

For spatial multiplexing, the layer mapping shall be done according to Table 6.3.3.2-1. The number of layers υ is less than or equal to the number of antenna ports P used for transmission of the physical channel.

Table 6.3.3.2-1: Codeword-to-layer mapping for spatial multiplexing

Number of layers Number of code words

Codeword-to-layer mapping 1,...,1,0 layer

symb −= Mi

1 1 )()( )0()0( idix = )0(symb

layersymb MM =

)()( )0()0( idix = 2 2

)()( )1()1( idix = )1(

symb)0(

symblayersymb MMM ==

)()( )0()0( idix =

3 2

)12()()2()(

)1()2(

)1()1(

+==

idixidix 2)1(

symb)0(

symblayersymb MMM ==

)12()()2()(

)0()1(

)0()0(

+==

idixidix

4 2

)12()()2()(

)1()3(

)1()2(

+==

idixidix

22 )1(symb

)0(symb

layersymb MMM ==

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)37Release 8

6.3.3.3 Layer mapping for transmit diversity

For transmit diversity, the layer mapping shall be done according to Table 6.3.3.3-1. There is only one codeword and the number of layers υ is equal to the number of antenna ports P used for transmission of the physical channel.

Table 6.3.3.3-1: Codeword-to-layer mapping for transmit diversity

Number of layers Number of code words

Codeword-to-layer mapping 1,...,1,0 layer

symb −= Mi

2 1 )12()(

)2()()0()1(

)0()0(

+=

=

idix

idix

2)0(symb

layersymb MM =

4 1

)34()(

)24()(

)14()(

)4()(

)0()3(

)0()2(

)0()1(

)0()0(

+=

+=

+=

=

idix

idix

idix

idix

4)0(symb

layersymb MM =

6.3.4 Precoding

The precoder takes as input a block of vectors [ ]Tixixix )(...)()( )1()0( −= υ , 1,...,1,0 layersymb −= Mi from the layer

mapping and generates a block of vectors [ ]Tp iyiy ...)(...)( )(= , 1,...,1,0 apsymb −= Mi to be mapped onto resources on

each of the antenna ports, where )()( iy p represents the signal for antenna port p .

6.3.4.1 Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port

For transmission on a single antenna port, precoding is defined by

)()( )0()( ixiy p =

where { }5,4,0∈p is the number of the single antenna port used for transmission of the physical channel and

1,...,1,0 apsymb −= Mi , layer

symbapsymb MM = .

6.3.4.2 Precoding for spatial multiplexing

Precoding for spatial multiplexing is only used in combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing as described in Section 6.3.3.2. Spatial multiplexing supports two or four antenna ports and the set of antenna ports used is

{ }1,0∈p or { }3,2,1,0∈p , respectively.

6.3.4.2.1 Precoding for zero and small-delay CDD

For zero-delay and small-delay cyclic delay diversity (CDD), precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

=⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−− )(

)()()(

)(

)(

)1(

)0(

)1(

)0(

ix

ixiWkD

iy

iy

iP υ

where the precoding matrix )(iW is of size υ×P , the quantity )( ikD is a diagonal matrix for support of cyclic delay diversity, ik represents the frequency-domain index of the resource element to which complex-valued symbol )(iy is

mapped to and 1,...,1,0 apsymb −= Mi , layer

symbapsymb MM = .

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)38Release 8

The matrix )( ikD shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.1-1, where a UE-specific value of δ is semi-statically configured in the UE and the eNodeB by higher layer signalling. The quantity η in Table 6.3.4.2.1-1 is the smallest

number from the set { }2048,1024,512,256,128 such that RBsc

DLRB NN≥η .

Table 6.3.4.2.1-1: Zero and small delay cyclic delay diversity.

δ Set of antenna

ports used Number of layers

υ )( ikD No CDD

Small delay

1 { }1,0

2 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡⋅⋅− δπ ikje 20

01 0 η2

1

2 3

{ }3,2,1,0

4 ⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⋅⋅−

⋅⋅−

⋅⋅−

δπ

δπ

δπ

32

22

2

0000000000001

i

i

i

kj

kj

kj

ee

e0 η1

For spatial multiplexing, the values of )(iW shall be selected among the precoder elements in the codebook configured in the eNodeB and the UE. The eNodeB can further confine the precoder selection in the UE to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook subset restrictions. The configured codebook shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or 6.3.4.2.3-2.

6.3.4.2.2 Precoding for large delay CDD

For large-delay CDD, precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

=⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−− )(

)()()(

)(

)(

)1(

)0(

)1(

)0(

ix

ixUiDiW

iy

iy

P υ

where the precoding matrix )(iW is of size υ×P and 1,...,1,0 apsymb −= Mi , layer

symbapsymb MM = . The diagonal size- υυ× matrix

)(iD supporting cyclic delay diversity and the size- υυ× matrix U are both given by Table 6.3.4.2.2-1 for different numbers of layersυ .

The values of the precoding matrix )(iW shall be selected among the precoder elements in the codebook configured in the eNodeB and the UE. The eNodeB can further confine the precoder selection in the UE to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook subset restriction. The configured codebook shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or 6.3.4.2.3-2.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)39Release 8

Table 6.3.4.2.2-1: Large-delay cyclic delay diversity

Number of layers υ

U )(iD

1 [ ]1 [ ]1

2 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡− 221

11

21

πje ⎥

⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡− 220

01ije π

3 ⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−−

−−

3834

3432

11

111

31

ππ

ππ

jj

jj

eeee

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

34

32

0000001

ij

ij

ee

π

π

4

⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−−−

−−−

−−−

41841246

4124844

464442

111

1111

21

πππ

πππ

πππ

jjj

jjj

jjj

eeeeeeeee

⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

−

46

44

42

0000000000001

ij

ij

ij

ee

e

π

π

π

6.3.4.2.3 Codebook for precoding

For transmission on two antenna ports, { }1,0∈p , the precoding matrix )(iW for zero, small, and large-delay CDD shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or a subset thereof.

Table 6.3.4.2.3-1: Codebook for transmission on antenna ports { }1,0 .

Codebook index

Number of layers υ

1 2

0 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡01

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡1001

21

1 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡10

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−1111

21

2 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡11

21

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡− jj11

21

3 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−11

21

-

4 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡j1

21

-

5 ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡− j1

21

-

For transmission on four antenna ports, { }3,2,1,0∈p , the precoding matrix W for zero, small, and large-delay CDD

shall be selected from Table 6.3.4.2.3-2 or a subset thereof. The quantity }{snW denotes the matrix defined by the

columns given by the set }{s from the expression nHn

Hnnn uuuuIW 2−= where I is the 44× identity matrix and the

vector nu is given by Table 6.3.4.2.3-2.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)40Release 8

Table 6.3.4.2.3-2: Codebook for transmission on antenna ports{ }3,2,1,0 .

Codebook index nu Number of layers υ

1 2 3 4 0 [ ]Tu 11110 −−−= }1{

0W 2}14{0W 3}124{

0W 2}1234{0W

1 [ ]Tjju 111 −= }1{1W 2}12{

1W 3}123{1W 2}1234{

1W

2 [ ]Tu 11112 −= }1{2W 2}12{

2W 3}123{2W 2}3214{

2W

3 [ ]Tjju −= 113 }1{3W 2}12{

3W 3}123{3W 2}3214{

3W

4 [ ]Tjjju 2)1(2)1(14 −−−−= }1{4W 2}14{

4W 3}124{4W 2}1234{

4W

5 [ ]Tjjju 2)1(2)1(15 −−−= }1{

5W 2}14{5W 3}124{

5W 2}1234{5W

6 [ ]Tjjju 2)1(2)1(16 +−−+= }1{6W 2}13{

6W 3}134{6W 2}1324{

6W

7 [ ]Tjjju 2)1(2)1(17 ++−= }1{

7W 2}13{7W 3}134{

7W 2}1324{7W

8 [ ]Tu 11118 −= }1{8W 2}12{

8W 3}124{8W 2}1234{

8W

9 [ ]Tjju −−−= 119 }1{9W 2}14{

9W 3}134{9W 2}1234{

9W

10 [ ]Tu 111110 −= }1{10W 2}13{

10W 3}123{10W 2}1324{

10W

11 [ ]Tjju 1111 −= }1{11W 2}13{

11W 3}134{11W 2}1324{

11W

12 [ ]Tu 111112 −−= }1{12W 2}12{

12W 3}123{12W 2}1234{

12W

13 [ ]Tu 111113 −−= }1{13W 2}13{

13W 3}123{13W 2}1324{

13W

14 [ ]Tu 111114 −−= }1{14W 2}13{

14W 3}123{14W 2}3214{

14W

15 [ ]Tu 111115 = }1{15W 2}12{

15W 3}123{15W 2}1234{

15W

6.3.4.3 Precoding for transmit diversity

Precoding for transmit diversity is only used in combination with layer mapping for transmit diversity as described in Section 6.3.3.3. The precoding operation for transmit diversity is defined for two and four antenna ports.

For transmission on two antenna ports, { }1,0∈p , the output [ ]Tiyiyiy )()()( )1()0(= of the precoding operation is defined by

( )( )( )( )⎥⎥

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−=

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++

)(Im)(Im)(Re)(Re

001010010

001

21

)12()12(

)2()2(

)1(

)0(

)1(

)0(

)1(

)0(

)1(

)0(

ixixixix

jjj

j

iyiy

iyiy

for 1,...,1,0 layersymb −= Mi with layer

symbapsymb 2MM = .

For transmission on four antenna ports, { }3,2,1,0∈p , the output [ ]Tiyiyiyiyiy )()()()()( )3()2()1()0(= of the precoding operation is defined by

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)41Release 8

( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )⎥

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

−

−

=

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++++++++++++

)(Im)(Im)(Im)(Im)(Re)(Re)(Re)(Re

000010000000000

000100000000000

000100000000000000010000000000000000000000001000000000000010000000000000010000000000000001

21

)34()34()34()34()24()24()24()24()14()14()14()14(

)4()4()4()4(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

ixixixixixixixix

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

iyiyiyiyiyiyiyiyiyiyiyiy

iyiyiyiy

for 1,...,1,0 layersymb −= Mi with layer

symbapsymb 4MM = .

6.3.5 Mapping to resource elements For each of the antenna ports used for transmission of the physical channel, the block of complex-valued symbols

)1(),...,0( apsymb

)()( −Myy pp shall be mapped in sequence starting with )0()( py to resource elements ( )lk, in the physical resource blocks corresponding to the virtual resource blocks assigned for transmission and not used for transmission of PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, PBCH, synchronization signals or reference signals. The mapping to resource elements ( )lk, on antenna port p not reserved for other purposes shall be in increasing order of first the index k and then the index l , starting with the first slot in a subframe.

6.4 Physical downlink shared channel The physical downlink shared channel shall be processed and mapped to resource elements as described in Section 6.3 with the following exceptions:

- The set of antenna ports used for transmission of the PDSCH is one of { }0 , { }1,0 , or { }3,2,1,0 if UE-specific reference signals are not transmitted

- The antenna ports used for transmission of the PDSCH is { }5 if UE-specific reference signals are transmitted

6.5 Physical multicast channel The physical multicast channel shall be processed and mapped to resource elements as described in Section 6.3 with the following exceptions:

- No transmit diversity scheme is specified

- Layer mapping and precoding shall be done assuming a single antenna port and the transmission shall use antenna port 4.

- In subframes where PMCH is transmitted on a carrier supporting a mix of PDSCH and PMCH transmission, up to two of the first OFDM symbols of a subframe can be reserved for non-MBSFN transmission and shall not be used for PMCH transmission. The non-MBSFN symbols shall use the same cyclic prefix as used for subframe #0.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)42Release 8

- PMCH shall not be transmitted in subframes 0 and 5 on a carrier supporting a mix of PDSCH and PMCH transmission

6.6 Physical broadcast channel

6.6.1 Scrambling The block of bits )1(),...,0( bit −Mbb , where bitM , the number of bits transmitted on the physical broadcast channel, equals 1920 for normal cyclic prefix and 1728 for extended cyclic prefix, shall be scrambled with a cell-specific sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits )1(

~),...,0(

~bit −Mbb according to

( ) 2mod)()()(~

icibib +=

where the scrambling sequence )(ic is given by Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence shall be initialised with cellIDinit Nc = in each radio frame fulfilling 04modf =n .

6.6.2 Modulation


),...,0(~

bit −Mbb shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd . Table 6.6.2-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical broadcast channel.

Table 6.6.2-1: PBCH modulation schemes

Physical channel Modulation schemesPBCH QPSK

6.6.3 Layer mapping and precoding The block of modulation symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd shall be mapped to layers according to one of Sections 6.3.3.1

or 6.3.3.3 with symb)0(

symb MM = and precoded according to one of Sections 6.3.4.1 or 6.3.4.3, resulting in a block of

vectors [ ]TP iyiyiy )(...)()( )1()0( −= , 1,...,0 symb −= Mi , where )()( iy p represents the signal for antenna port p and

where 1,...,0 −= Pp and the number of antenna ports for cell-specific reference signals { }4,2,1∈P .

6.6.4 Mapping to resource elements

The block of complex-valued symbols )1(),...,0( symb)()( −Myy pp for each antenna port is transmitted during 4

consecutive radio frames starting in each radio frame fulfilling 04modf =n and shall be mapped in sequence starting with )0(y to resource elements ( )lk, . The mapping to resource elements ( )lk, not reserved for transmission of reference signals shall be in increasing order of first the index k , then the index l in slot 1 in subframe 0 and finally the radio frame number. The resource-element indices are given by

3,...,1,0

71,...,1,0' ,'362

RBsc

DLRB

=

=+−=

l

kkNN

k

where resource elements reserved for reference signals shall be excluded. The mapping operation shall assume cell-specific reference signals for antenna ports 0-3 being present irrespective of the actual configuration. Resource elements assumed to be reserved for reference signals in the mapping operation above but not used for transmission of reference signal shall not be used for transmission of any physical channel.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)43Release 8

6.7 Physical control format indicator channel The physical control format indicator channel carries information about the number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of PDCCHs in a subframe. The set of OFDM symbols possible to use for PDCCH in a subframe is given by Table 6.7-1.

Table 6.7-1: Maximum number of OFDM symbols used for PDCCH.

Subframe Number of OFDM symbols for PDCCH Subframe 1 and 6 for frame structure type 2 1, 2 MBSFN subframes on a carrier supporting both PMCH and PDSCH 1, 2 MBSFN subframes on a carrier not supporting PDSCH 0 All other subframes 1, 2, 3

6.7.1 Scrambling The block of bits )31(),...,0( bb transmitted in one subframe shall be scrambled with a cell-specific sequence prior to

modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits )31(~

),...,0(~

bb according to

( ) 2mod)()()(~

icibib +=


with ⎣ ⎦ cellID

9sinit 22 Nnc +⋅= at the start of each subframe.

6.7.2 Modulation


),...,0(~

bb shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols )15(),...,0( dd . Table 6.7.2-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical control format indicator channel.

Table 6.7.2-1: PCFICH modulation schemes

Physical channel Modulation schemesPCFICH QPSK

6.7.3 Layer mapping and precoding The block of modulation symbols )15(),...,0( dd shall be mapped to layers according to one of Sections 6.3.3.1 or

6.3.3.3 with 16)0(symb =M and precoded according to one of Sections 6.3.4.1 or 6.3.4.3, resulting in a block of vectors

[ ]TP iyiyiy )(...)()( )1()0( −= , 15,...,0=i , where )()( iy p represents the signal for antenna port p and where 1,...,0 −= Pp and the number of antenna ports for cell-specific reference signals { }4,2,1∈P . The PCFICH shall be

transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the PBCH.

6.7.4 Mapping to resource elements The mapping to resource elements is defined in terms of quadruplets of complex-valued symbols. Let

)34(),24(),14(),4()( )()()()()( +++= iyiyiyiyiz ppppp denote symbol quadruplet i for antenna port p . For each of

the antenna ports, symbol quadruplets shall be mapped in increasing order of i to the four resource-element groups in the first OFDM symbol in a downlink subframe with the representative resource-element as defined in Section 6.2.4 given by

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)44Release 8

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ 223by drepresente groupelement -resource the tomapped is)3(

222by drepresente groupelement -resource the tomapped is)2(

22by drepresente groupelement -resource the tomapped is)1(by drepresente groupelement -resource the tomapped is)0(

RBsc

DLRB

)(

RBsc

DLRB

)(

RBsc

DLRB

)(

)(

NNkkz

NNkkz

NNkkzkkz

p

p

p

p

⋅+=

⋅+=

⋅+=

=

where the additions are modulo RBsc

DLRB NN ,

( ) ( )DLRB

cellID

RBsc 2mod2 NNNk ⋅=

and cellIDN is the physical-layer cell identity as given by Section 6.11.

6.8 Physical downlink control channel

6.8.1 PDCCH formats The physical downlink control channel carries scheduling assignments and other control information. A physical control channel is transmitted on an aggregation of one or several consecutive control channel elements (CCEs), where a control channel element corresponds to a set of resource elements. The CCEs available in the system are numbered from 0 and upwards. The PDCCH supports multiple formats as listed in Table 6.8.1-1. A PDCCH consisting of n consecutive CCEs may only start on a CCE fulfilling 0mod =ni , where i is the CCE number.

Multiple PDCCHs can be transmitted in a subframe.

Table 6.8.1-1: Supported PDCCH formats

PDCCH format

Number of CCEs

Number of PDCCH bits

0 1 1 2 2 4 3 8

6.8.2 PDCCH multiplexing and scrambling

The block of bits )1(),...,0( (i)bit

)()( −Mbb ii on each of the control channels to be transmitted in a subframe, where (i)bitM is

the number of bits in one subframe to be transmitted on physical downlink control channel number i , shall be multiplexed, resulting in a block of bits )1(),...,0(),...,1(),...,0(),1(),...,0( 1)-(

bit)1()1((1)

bit)1()1((0)

bit)0()0( PDCCHPDCCHPDCCH −−− −− nnn MbbMbbMbb , where PDCCHn is the

number of PDCCHs transmitted in the subframe.

The block of bits )1(),...,0(),...,1(),...,0(),1(),...,0( 1)-(bit

)1()1((1)bit

)1()1((0)bit

)0()0( PDCCHPDCCHPDCCH −−− −− nnn MbbMbbMbb shall be scrambled with a cell-specific sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits

)1(~

),...,0(~

tot −Mbb according to

( ) 2mod)()()(~

icibib +=


with ⎣ ⎦ cellID

9sinit 22 Nnc += at the start of each subframe.

If necessary, dummy elements shall be inserted in the block of bits prior to scrambling to ensure that the PDCCHs starts

at the CCE positions as described in [4] and to ensure that the length ∑ −

=≥

1

0)(

bittotPDCCHn

iiMM of the scrambled block of

bits matches the amount of resources reserved for PDCCH transmission.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)45Release 8

6.8.3 Modulation


),...,0(~

tot −Mbb shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd . Table 6.8.3-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical downlink control channel.

Table 6.8.3-1: PDCCH modulation schemes

Physical channel Modulation schemesPDCCH QPSK

6.8.4 Layer mapping and precoding The block of modulation symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd shall be mapped to layers according to one of Sections 6.3.3.1

or 6.3.3.3 with symb)0(

symb MM = and precoded according to one of Sections 6.3.4.1 or 6.3.4.3, resulting in a block of

vectors [ ]TP iyiyiy )(...)()( )1()0( −= , 1,...,0 symb −= Mi to be mapped onto resources on the antenna ports used for

transmission, where )()( iy p represents the signal for antenna port p . The PDCCH shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the PBCH.

6.8.5 Mapping to resource elements The mapping to resource elements is defined by operations on quadruplets of complex-valued symbols. Let

)34(),24(),14(),4()( )()()()()( +++= iyiyiyiyiz ppppp denote symbol quadruplet i for antenna port p .

The block of quadruplets )1(),...,0( quad)()( −Mzz pp , where 4symbquad MM = , shall be permuted according to Section

5.1.4.2.1 of [3], resulting in )1(),...,0( quad)()( −Mww pp .

The block of quadruplets )1(),...,0( quad)()( −Mww pp shall be cyclically shifted, resulting in

)1(),...,0( quad)()( −Mww pp where ( ) ( )quad

cellID

)()( mod)( MNiwiw pp += .

Mapping of the block of quadruplets )1(),...,0( quad)()( −Mww pp is defined in terms of resource-element groups,

specified in Section 6.2.4, according to steps 1–10 below:

1) Initialize 0=′m (resource-element group number)

2) Initialize 0'=k

3) Initialize 0'=l

4) If the resource element ),( lk ′′ represents a resource-element group not assigned to PCFICH or PHICH then perform step 5 and 6, else go to step 7

5) Map symbol-quadruplet )'()( mw p to the resource-element group represented by ),( lk ′′ for each antenna port p

6) Increase m′ by 1

7) Increase 'l by 1

8) Repeat from step 4 if Ll <' , where 3≤L corresponds to the value represented by the sequence transmitted on the PCFICH

9) Increase 'k by 1

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)46Release 8

10) Repeat from step 3 if RBsc

DLRB' NNk ⋅<

6.9 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel The PHICH carries the hybrid-ARQ ACK/NAK. Multiple PHICHs mapped to the same set of resource elements constitute a PHICH group, where PHICHs within the same PHICH group are separated through different orthogonal sequences. A PHICH resource is identified by the index pair ( )seq

PHICHgroupPHICH ,nn , where group

PHICHn is the PHICH group

number and seqPHICHn is the orthogonal sequence index within the group.

6.9.1 Modulation The block of bits )1(),...,0( bit −Mbb transmitted on one PHICH in one subframe shall be modulated as described in Section 7.1, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols )1(),...,0( s −Mzz , where bits MM = . Table 6.9.1-1 specifies the modulation mappings applicable for the physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel.

Table 6.9.1-1: PHICH modulation schemes

Physical channel Modulation schemesPHICH BPSK

The block of modulation symbols )1(),...,0( s −Mzz shall be bit-wise multiplied with an orthogonal sequence, resulting in a sequence of modulation symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd according to

( ) ( ) ⎣ ⎦( )PHICHSF

PHICHSF )(21mod)( NizicNiwid ⋅−⋅=

where

⎩⎨⎧

=

⋅=

−=


1,...,0

PHICHSF

sPHICHSFsymb

symb

N

MNM

Mi

and )(ic is a cell-specific scrambling sequence generated according to Section 7.2. The scrambling sequence generator

shall be initialised with ⎣ ⎦ cellID

9sinit 22 Nnc +⋅= at the start of each subframe.

The sequence [ ])1()0( PHICHSF −Nww is given by Table 6.9.1-2 where the sequence index seq

PHICHn corresponds to the PHICH number within the PHICH group.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)47Release 8

Table 6.9.1-2: Orthogonal sequences [ ])1()0( PHICHSF −Nww for PHICH

Sequence index Orthogonal sequence seqPHICHn Normal cyclic prefix

4PHICHSF =N

Extended cyclic prefix 2PHICH

SF =N

0 [ ]1111 ++++ [ ]11 ++

1 [ ]1111 −+−+ [ ]11 −+

2 [ ]1111 −−++ [ ]jj ++

3 [ ]1111 +−−+ [ ]jj −+

4 [ ]jjjj ++++ -

5 [ ]jjjj −+−+ -

6 [ ]jjjj −−++ -

7 [ ]jjjj +−−+ -

6.9.2 Layer mapping and precoding The block of symbols )1(),...,0( symb −Mdd shall be mapped to layers and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors

[ ]TP iyiyiy )(...)()( )1()0( −= , 1,...,0 symb −= Mi , where )()( iy p represents the signal for antenna port p ,

1,...,0 −= Pp and the number of antenna ports for cell-specific reference signals { }4,2,1∈P . The layer mapping and precoding operation depends on the cyclic prefix length and the number of antenna ports used for transmission of the PHICH. The PHICH shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the PBCH.

For transmission on a single antenna port, 1=P , layer mapping and precoding are defined by Sections 6.3.3.1 and 6.3.4.1, respectively, with symb

)0(symb MM = .

For transmission on two antenna ports, 2=P , layer mapping and precoding are defined by Sections 6.3.3.3 and 6.3.4.3, respectively, with symb

)0(symb MM = .

For transmission on four antenna ports, 4=P , and normal cyclic prefix, layer mapping is defined by Section 6.3.3.3 and precoding by

( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )⎥

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

−

−

=

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++++++++++++


00000000000010000000000

000100000000000

0001000000000000000100000000000000001000000000000010000000000000010000000000000001

21

)34()34()34()34()24()24()24()24()14()14()14()14(

)4()4()4()4(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

ixixixixixixixix

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j


iyiyiyiy

if 02mod)( groupPHICH =+ ni where group

PHICHn is the PHICH group number and 2,1,0=i , and by

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)48Release 8

( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )⎥

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

−

−

=

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++++++

++++++


000010000000000

000100000000000

000100000000000000010000000000000000100000000000001000000000000001000000000000000100000000

21

)34()34()34()34()24()24()24()24()14()14()14()14(

)4()4()4()4(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

ixixixixixixixix

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j


iyiyiyiy

where 2,1,0=i otherwise.

For transmission on four antenna ports, 4=P , and extended cyclic prefix, layer mapping is defined by

[ ] [ ][ ]⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

=++

=+=

12mod)12()02(00

02mod00)12()2()()()()(

groupPHICH

)0()0(

groupPHICH

)0()0()3()2()1()0(

nidid

nididixixixix T

TT

where groupPHICHn is the PHICH group number, 2,1,0=i , and precoding by

( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )⎥

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

−

−

=

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++++++++++++


00000000000010000000000

000100000000000

0001000000000000000100000000000000001000000000000010000000000000010000000000000001

21

)34()34()34()34()24()24()24()24()14()14()14()14(

)4()4()4()4(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

ixixixixixixixix

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j


iyiyiyiy

if ⎣ ⎦ 02mod)2( groupPHICH =+ ni and by

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)49Release 8

( )( )( )( )( )( )( )( )⎥

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−

−

−

−

=

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

++++++

++++++


000010000000000

000100000000000

000100000000000000010000000000000000100000000000001000000000000001000000000000000100000000

21

)34()34()34()34()24()24()24()24()14()14()14()14(

)4()4()4()4(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

)3(

)2(

)1(

)0(

ixixixixixixixix

j

j

j

j

j

j

j

j


iyiyiyiy

otherwise.

6.9.3 Mapping to resource elements

The sequence )1(),...,0( symb)()( −Myy pp for each of the PHICH groups is defined by

∑= )()( )()( nyny pi

p

where the sum is over all PHICHs in the PHICH group and )()( ny pi represents the symbol sequence from the i :th

PHICH in the PHICH group.

Let )34(),24(),14(),4()( )()()()()( +++= iyiyiyiyiz ppppp , 2,1,0=i denote symbol quadruplet i for antenna port p .

Mapping to resource elements is defined in terms of symbol quadruplets according to steps 1–10 below:

1) For each value of 2,1,0=i

2) Let in denote the number of resource element groups not assigned to PCFICH in OFDM symbol i

3) Number the resource-element groups not assigned to PCFICH in OFDM symbol i from 0 to 1−in , starting from the resource-element group with the lowest frequency-domain index.

4) Initialize 0=′m (PHICH group number)

5) For each value of 2,1,0=i

6) Symbol-quadruplet )()( iz p from PHICH group 'm is mapped to the resource-element group represented by

ilk ),( ′′ as defined in Section 6.2.4 where the indices ik ′ and il′ are given by steps 7 and 8 below:

7) The time-domain index il′ is given by

⎣ ⎦( )⎣ ⎦( )

⎪⎪⎩

⎪⎪⎨

⎧

++′++′

=′

otherwise2 typestructure framein 6 and 1 subframe duration, PHICH extended2mod12

subframes MBSFN duration, PHICH extended2mod12subframes all duration, PHICH normal0

iimim

li

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)50Release 8

8) Set the frequency-domain index ik ′ to the resource-element group assigned the number in in step 3 above, where in is given by

⎣ ⎦( )⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦( )⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦( )⎪

⎪

⎩

⎪⎪

⎨

⎧

=++⋅

=++⋅

=+⋅

=

′′′

′′′

′′

2mod32'

1mod3'

0mod'

1cellID

1cellID

1cellID

innmnnN

innmnnN

inmnnN

n

iii

iii

ii

lll

lll

ll

i

in case of extended PHICH duration in MBSFN subframes, or extended PHICH duration in subframe 1 and 6 for frame structure type 2 and by

⎣ ⎦( )⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦( )⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦( )⎪

⎪

⎩

⎪⎪

⎨

⎧

=++⋅

=++⋅

=+⋅

=

′′′

′′′

′′

2mod32'

1mod3'

0mod'

0cellID

0cellID

0cellID

innmnnN

innmnnN

inmnnN

n

iii

iii

ii

lll

lll

ll

i

otherwise.

9) Increase m′ by 1.

10) Repeat from step 5 until all PHICH groups have been assigned.

The PHICH duration is configurable by higher layers according to Table 6.9.3-1. The duration configured puts a lower limit on the size of the control region signalled by the PCFICH.

Table 6.9.3-1: PHICH duration in MBSFN and non-MBSFN subframes.

Non-MBSFN subframes MBSFN subframes PHICH duration Subframes 1 and 6 in case of

frame structure type 2 All other cases On a carrier supporting

both PDSCH and PMCH Normal 1 1 1 Extended 2 3 2

6.10 Reference signals Three types of downlink reference signals are defined:

- Cell-specific reference signals, associated with non-MBSFN transmission

- MBSFN reference signals, associated with MBSFN transmission

- UE-specific reference signals

There is one reference signal transmitted per downlink antenna port.

6.10.1 Cell-specific reference signals Cell-specific reference signals shall be transmitted in all downlink subframes in a cell supporting non-MBSFN transmission. In case the subframe is used for transmission with MBSFN, only the first two OFDM symbols in a subframe can be used for transmission of cell-specific reference symbols.

Cell-specific reference signals are transmitted on one or several of antenna ports 0 to 3.

Cell-specific reference signals are defined for kHz 15=Δf only.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)51Release 8


The reference-signal sequence )(s, mr nl is defined by

( ) ( ) 12,...,1,0 ,)12(212

1)2(212

1)( DLmax,RB, s

−=+⋅−+⋅−= Nmmcjmcmr nl

where sn is the slot number within a radio frame and l is the OFDM symbol number within the slot. The pseudo-random sequence )(ic is defined in Section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with

⎣ ⎦ cellIDs

913init 222 Nnlc +⋅+′⋅= at the start of each OFDM symbol where ( ) lNnl +⋅=′ DL

symbs 2mod is the OFDM symbol number with a subframe.

6.10.1.2 Mapping to resource elements

The reference signal sequence )(s, mr nl shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols )(

,plka used as reference

symbols for antenna port p in slot sn according to

)'(s,

)(, mra nlplk =

where

( ){ }{ }

DLRB

DLmax,RB

DLRB

DLsymb

shift

12,...,1,0

3,2 if11,0 if3,0

6mod6

NNmm

Nm

ppNl

vvmk

−+=′

−⋅=

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

∈∈−

=

++=

The variables v and shiftv define the position in the frequency domain for the different reference signals where v is given by

⎪⎪⎪⎪

⎩

⎪⎪⎪⎪

⎨

⎧

=+=

≠===≠===

=

3 if)2mod(332 if)2mod(3

0 and 1 if00 and 1 if30 and 0 if30 and 0 if0

s

s

pnpn

lplplplp

v

The cell-specific frequency shift is given by 6modcellIDshift Nv = .

Resource elements ( )lk, used for reference signal transmission on any of the antenna ports in a slot shall not be used for any transmission on any other antenna port in the same slot and set to zero.

Figures 6.10.1.2-1 and 6.10.1.2-2 illustrate the resource elements used for reference signal transmission according to the above definition. The notation pR is used to denote a resource element used for reference signal transmission on antenna port p .

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)52Release 8

0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

6=l 0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

6=l

One

an

tenn

a po

rtT

wo

ante

nna

por

ts

Resource element ( )

Not used for transmission on this antenan port

Reference symbols on this antenna port

0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

6=l 0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

6=l 0=l

1R

1

1R

1R

6=l 0=l

1R

1R

1R

1R

6=l

0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

6=l 0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

6=l 0=l

1R

1R

1R

1R

6=l 0=l

1R

1R

1R

1R

6=l

Fou

r an

tenn

a p

orts

0=l 6=l 0=l

2R

6=l 0=l 6=l 0=l 6=l2R

2R

2R

3R

3R

3R

3R

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

Antenna port 0

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

Antenna port 1

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

Antenna port 2

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

Antenna port 3

Figure 6.10.1.2-1. Mapping of downlink reference signals (normal cyclic prefix).

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)53Release 8

0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

5=l 0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

5=l

Resource element ( )

Not used for transmission on this antenan port

Reference symbols on this antenna port

0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

5=l 0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

5=l 0=l

1R

1

1R

1R

5=l 0=l

1R

1R

1R

1R

5=l

0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

5=l 0=l0R

0R

0R

0R

5=l 0=l

1R

1R

1R

1R

5=l 0=l

1R

1R

1R

1R

5=l 0=l 5=l 0=l

2R

5=l 0=l 5=l 0=l 5=l2R

2R

2R

3R

3R

3R

3R

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

Antenna port 0 Antenna port 1 Antenna port 2 Antenna port 3

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

even-numbered slots

odd-numbered slots

Figure 6.10.1.2-2. Mapping of downlink reference signals (extended cyclic prefix).

6.10.2 MBSFN reference signals MBSFN reference signals shall only be transmitted in subframes allocated for MBSFN transmissions. MBSFN reference signals are transmitted on antenna port 4.

MBSFN reference signals are defined for extended cyclic prefix only.


The MBSFN reference-signal sequence )(s, mr nl is defined by

( ) ( ) 16,...,1,0 ,)12(212

1)2(212

1)( DLmax,RB, s

−=+⋅−+⋅−= Nmmcjmcmr nl

where sn is the slot number within a radio frame and l is the OFDM symbol number within the slot. The pseudo-random sequence )(ic is defined in Section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with

⎣ ⎦ MBSFNIDs

913init 222 Nnlc +⋅+′⋅= at the start of each OFDM symbol where ( ) lNnl +⋅=′ DL

symbs 2mod is the OFDM symbol number with a subframe.


The reference-signal sequence )(s, mr nl ′ in OFDM symbol l shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols

)(,plka with 4=p according to

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)54Release 8

)(s,

)(, mra nlplk ′=

where

( )DLRB

DLmax,RB

DLRB

s

s

s

s

3

16,...,1,0

kHz 5.7 and 12mod if2,0kHz 5.7 and 02mod if1

kHz 15 and 12mod if4,0kHz 15 and 02mod if2

kHz 5.7 and 0 if24kHz 5.7 and 0 if4

kHz 15 and 0 if12kHz 15 and 0 if2

NNmm

Nm

fnfnfnfn

l

flmflmflmflm

k

−+=′

−=

⎪⎪⎩

⎪⎪⎨

⎧

=Δ==Δ==Δ==Δ=

=

⎪⎪⎩

⎪⎪⎨

⎧

=Δ=+=Δ≠=Δ=+=Δ≠

=

Figure 6.10.2.2-1 illustrates the resource elements used for MBSFN reference signal transmission in case of kHz 15=Δf . In case of kHz 5.7=Δf for a MBSFN-dedicated cell, the MBSFN reference signal shall be mapped to

resource elements according to Figure 6.10.2.2-3. The notation pR is used to denote a resource element used for reference signal transmission on antenna port p .

0=l 5=l 0=l 5=l4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

Figure 6.10.2.2-1: Mapping of MBSFN reference signals (extended cyclic prefix, kHz 15=Δf )

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)55Release 8

0=l 2=l 0=l 2=leven-

numberedslots

Antenna port 4

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

odd-numbered

slots

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

4R

Figure 6.10.2.2-3: Mapping of MBSFN reference signals (extended cyclic prefix, kHz 5.7=Δf )

6.10.3 UE-specific reference signals UE-specific reference signals are supported for single-antenna-port transmission of PDSCH and are transmitted on antenna port 5. The UE is informed by higher layers whether the UE-specific reference signal is present and is a valid phase reference for PDSCH demodulation or not. If higher layer signalling informs the UE that the UE-specific reference signals are present and is a valid phase reference for PDSCH demodulation, the UE may ignore any transmission on antenna port 2 and 3. UE-specific reference signals are transmitted only on the resource blocks upon which the corresponding PDSCH is mapped.


The UE-specific reference-signal sequence )(mr is defined by

( ) ( ) 11210 ,)12(212

1)2(212

1)( PDSCHRB −=+⋅−+⋅−= N,...,,mmcjmcmr

where PDSCHRBN denotes the bandwidth in resource blocks of the corresponding PDSCH transmission.. The pseudo-

random sequence )(ic is defined in Section 7.2. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised with

⎣ ⎦ cellIDs

9RNTI

13init 222 Nnnc +⋅+⋅= at the start of each subframe.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)56Release 8


In a physical resource block with frequency-domain index BPRn assigned for the corresponding PDSCH transmission,

the reference signal sequence )(mr shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols )(,plka with 5=p in a

subframe according to

)3( PDSCHRB

)(, mNlra plk +⋅′⋅=

where

{ }{ }

13,...,1,0

prefix cyclic normal and 12mod if2,3prefix cyclic normal and 02mod if1,0

35221603

prefix cyclic normal and 6,5 if24mprefix cyclic normal and 3,2 if4

PDSCHRB

s

s

PRBRBsc

−=

⎩⎨⎧

==

=′

⎪⎪⎩

⎪⎪⎨

⎧

=′=′=′=′

=

⎩⎨⎧

∈+∈

=′

⋅+′=

Nm

nn

l

llll

l

llm

k

nNkk

The mapping shall be in increasing order of the frequency-domain index BPRn of the physical resource blocks assigned

for the corresponding PDSCH transmission. The quantity PDSCHRBN denotes the bandwidth in resource blocks of the

corresponding PDSCH transmission.

Figure 6.10.3.2-1 illustrates the resource elements used for UE-specific reference signals for normal cyclic prefix. The notation pR is used to denote a resource element used for reference signal transmission on antenna port p .

0=l

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

5R

0=l 6=l6=l

Figure 6.10.2.2-1: Mapping of UE-specific reference signals (normal cyclic prefix)

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)57Release 8

6.11 Synchronization signals There are 504 unique physical-layer cell identities. The physical-layer cell identities are grouped into 168 unique physical-layer cell-identity groups, each group containing three unique identities. The grouping is such that each physical-layer cell identity is part of one and only one physical-layer cell-identity group. A physical-layer cell identity

(2)ID

(1)ID

cellID 3 NNN += is thus uniquely defined by a number (1)

IDN in the range of 0 to 167, representing the physical-layer

cell-identity group, and a number (2)IDN in the range of 0 to 2, representing the physical-layer identity within the

physical-layer cell-identity group.

6.11.1 Primary synchronization signal


The sequence )(nd used for the primary synchronization signal is generated from a frequency-domain Zadoff-Chu sequence according to

⎪⎩

⎪⎨

⎧

=

== ++−

+−

61,...,32,31

30,...,1,0)(63

)2)(1(

63)1(

ne

nend nnuj

nunj

u π

π

where the Zadoff-Chu root sequence index u is given by Table 6.11.1.1-1.

Table 6.11.1.1-1: Root indices for the primary synchronization signal.

(2)IDN Root index u

0 25 1 29 2 34


The mapping of the sequence to resource elements depends on the frame structure. The antenna port used for transmission of the primary synchronization signal is not specified.

The sequence ( )nd shall be mapped to the resource elements according to

( )

231

61,...,0 ,RBsc

DLRB

,

NNnk

nnda lk

+−=

==

For frame structure type 1, the primary synchronization signal shall be mapped to the last OFDM symbol in slots 0 and 10.

For frame structure type 2, the primary synchronization signal shall be mapped to the third OFDM symbol in subframes 1 and 6. Resource elements ),( lk in the OFDM symbols used for transmission of the primary synchronization signal where

66,...63,62,1,...,4,52

31RBsc

DLRB

−−−=

+−=

n

NNnk

are reserved and not used for transmission of the primary synchronization signal.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)58Release 8

6.11.2 Secondary synchronization signal


The sequence )61(),...,0( dd used for the second synchronization signal is an interleaved concatenation of two length-31 binary sequences. The concatenated sequence is scrambled with a scrambling sequence given by the primary synchronization signal.

The combination of two length-31 sequences defining the secondary synchronization signal differs between subframe 0 and subframe 5 according to

( )( )( ) ( )( ) ( )⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

=+

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

=

5 subframein )(0 subframein )()12(

5 subframein )(0 subframein )()2(

)(11

)(0

)(11

)(1

0)(

1

0)(

0

10

01

1

0

nzncnsnzncnsnd

ncnsncnsnd

mm

mm

m

m

where 300 ≤≤ n . The indices 0m and 1m are derived from the physical-layer cell-identity group (1)IDN according to

⎣ ⎦( )

⎣ ⎦30,30

2)1(,2)1(

31mod13131mod

(1)ID

(1)ID(1)

ID

01

0

NqqqN

qqqNm

mmmmm

=′⎥⎥⎦

⎥

⎢⎢⎣

⎢ +′′+=++=′

+′+=

′=

where the output of the above expression is listed in Table 6.11.2.1-1.

The two sequences )()(0

0 ns m and )()(1

1 ns m are defined as two different cyclic shifts of the m-sequence )(~ ns according to

( )( )31mod)(~)(

31mod)(~)(

1)(

1

0)(

0

1

0

mnsns

mnsnsm

m

+=

+=

where )(21)(~ ixis −= , 300 ≤≤ i , is defined by

( ) 250 ,2mod)()2()5( ≤≤++=+ iixixix

with initial conditions 1)4(,0)3(,0)2(,0)1(,0)0( ===== xxxxx .

The two scrambling sequences )(0 nc and )(1 nc depend on the primary synchronization signal and are defined by two different cyclic shifts of the m-sequence )(~ nc according to

)31mod)3((~)(

)31mod)((~)()2(

ID1

)2(ID0

++=

+=

Nncnc

Nncnc

where { }2,1,0)2(ID ∈N is the physical-layer identity within the physical-layer cell identity group (1)

IDN and )(21)(~ ixic −= , 300 ≤≤ i , is defined by

( ) 250 ,2mod)()3()5( ≤≤++=+ iixixix


3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)59Release 8

The scrambling sequences )()(1

0 nz m are )()(1

0 nz m are defined by a cyclic shift of the m-sequence )(~ nz according to

)31mod))8mod(((~)( 0)(

10 mnznz m +=

)31mod))8mod(((~)( 1)(

11 mnznz m +=

where 0m and 1m are obtained from Table 6.11.2.1-1 and )(21)(~ ixiz −= , 300 ≤≤ i , is defined by

( ) 250 ,2mod)()1()2()4()5( ≤≤++++++=+ iixixixixix


Table 6.11.2.1-1: Mapping between physical-layer cell-identity group (1)IDN and the indices 0m and 1m .

(1)IDN 0m 1m

(1)IDN 0m 1m (1)

IDN 0m 1m (1)IDN 0m 1m (1)

IDN 0m 1m0 0 1 34 4 6 68 9 12 102 15 19 136 22 271 1 2 35 5 7 69 10 13 103 16 20 137 23 282 2 3 36 6 8 70 11 14 104 17 21 138 24 293 3 4 37 7 9 71 12 15 105 18 22 139 25 304 4 5 38 8 10 72 13 16 106 19 23 140 0 6 5 5 6 39 9 11 73 14 17 107 20 24 141 1 7 6 6 7 40 10 12 74 15 18 108 21 25 142 2 8 7 7 8 41 11 13 75 16 19 109 22 26 143 3 9 8 8 9 42 12 14 76 17 20 110 23 27 144 4 109 9 10 43 13 15 77 18 21 111 24 28 145 5 1110 10 11 44 14 16 78 19 22 112 25 29 146 6 1211 11 12 45 15 17 79 20 23 113 26 30 147 7 1312 12 13 46 16 18 80 21 24 114 0 5 148 8 1413 13 14 47 17 19 81 22 25 115 1 6 149 9 1514 14 15 48 18 20 82 23 26 116 2 7 150 10 1615 15 16 49 19 21 83 24 27 117 3 8 151 11 1716 16 17 50 20 22 84 25 28 118 4 9 152 12 1817 17 18 51 21 23 85 26 29 119 5 10 153 13 1918 18 19 52 22 24 86 27 30 120 6 11 154 14 2019 19 20 53 23 25 87 0 4 121 7 12 155 15 2120 20 21 54 24 26 88 1 5 122 8 13 156 16 2221 21 22 55 25 27 89 2 6 123 9 14 157 17 2322 22 23 56 26 28 90 3 7 124 10 15 158 18 2423 23 24 57 27 29 91 4 8 125 11 16 159 19 2524 24 25 58 28 30 92 5 9 126 12 17 160 20 2625 25 26 59 0 3 93 6 10 127 13 18 161 21 2726 26 27 60 1 4 94 7 11 128 14 19 162 22 2827 27 28 61 2 5 95 8 12 129 15 20 163 23 2928 28 29 62 3 6 96 9 13 130 16 21 164 24 3029 29 30 63 4 7 97 10 14 131 17 22 165 0 7 30 0 2 64 5 8 98 11 15 132 18 23 166 1 8 31 1 3 65 6 9 99 12 16 133 19 24 167 2 9 32 2 4 66 7 10 100 13 17 134 20 25 - - - 33 3 5 67 8 11 101 14 18 135 21 26 - - -


The mapping of the sequence to resource elements depends on the frame structure. In a subframe, the same antenna port as for the primary synchronization signal shall be used for the secondary synchronization signal.

The sequence ( )nd shall be mapped to resource elements according to

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)60Release 8

( )

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−

−=

+−=

==

2 typestructure framefor 11 and 1 slotsin 11 typestructure framefor 10 and 0 slotsin 2

231

61,...,0 ,

DLsymb

DLsymb

RBsc

DLRB

,

NN

l

NNnk

nnda lk

Resource elements ),( lk where

66,...63,62,1,...,4,5

2 typestructure framefor 11 and 1 slotsin 11 typestructure framefor 10 and 0 slotsin 2

231

DLsymb

DLsymb

RBsc

DLRB

−−−=

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−

−=

+−=

n

NN

l

NNnk

are reserved and not used for transmission of the secondary synchronization signal.

6.12 OFDM baseband signal generation The time-continuous signal ( )ts p

l)( on antenna port p in OFDM symbol l in a downlink slot is defined by

( ) ( )

⎣ ⎦

( )⎡ ⎤∑∑=

−Δ−

−=

−Δ ⋅+⋅= +−

2/

1

2)(,

1

2/

2)(,

)(RBsc

DLRB

s,CP)(

RBsc

DLRB

s,CP)(

NN

k

TNtfkjplk

NNk

TNtfkjplk

pl

ll eaeats ππ

for ( ) s,CP0 TNNt l ×+<≤ where ⎣ ⎦2RBsc

DLRB

)( NNkk +=− and ⎣ ⎦ 12RBsc

DLRB

)( −+=+ NNkk . The variable N equals 2048 for kHz 15=Δf subcarrier spacing and 4096 for kHz 5.7=Δf subcarrier spacing.

The OFDM symbols in a slot shall be transmitted in increasing order of l , starting with 0=l , where OFDM symbol

0>l starts at time ∑ −

=′ ′ +1

0 s,CP )(l

l l TNN within the slot. In case the first OFDM symbol(s) in a slot use normal cyclic

prefix and the remaining OFDM symbols use extended cyclic prefix, the starting position the OFDM symbols with extended cyclic prefix shall be identical to those in a slot where all OFDM symbols use extended cyclic prefix. Thus there will be a part of the time slot between the two cyclic prefix regions where the transmitted signal is not specified.

Table 6.12-1 lists the value of lN ,CP that shall be used. Note that different OFDM symbols within a slot in some cases have different cyclic prefix lengths.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)61Release 8

Table 6.12-1: OFDM parameters.

Configuration Cyclic prefix length lN ,CP

Normal cyclic prefix

kHz 15=Δf 0for 160 =l

6,...,2,1for 144 =l

kHz 15=Δf 5,...,1,0for 512 =l Extended cyclic prefix

kHz 5.7=Δf 2,1,0for 1024 =l

6.13 Modulation and upconversion Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for each antenna port is shown in Figure 6.13-1. The filtering required prior to transmission is defined by the requirements in [6].

{ })(Re )( ts pl

{ })(Im )( ts pl

( )tf02cos π

( )tf02sin π−

)()( ts pl

Figure 6.13-1: Downlink modulation.

7 Generic functions

7.1 Modulation mapper The modulation mapper takes binary digits, 0 or 1, as input and produces complex-valued modulation symbols, x=I+jQ, as output.

7.1.1 BPSK In case of BPSK modulation, a single bit0, )(ib , is mapped to a complex-valued modulation symbol x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.1-1.

Table 7.1.1-1: BPSK modulation mapping

)(ib I Q

0 21 21

1 21− 21−

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)62Release 8

7.1.2 QPSK In case of QPSK modulation, pairs of bits, )1(),( +ibib , are mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.2-1.

Table 7.1.2-1: QPSK modulation mapping

)1(),( +ibib I Q

00 21 21

01 21 21−

10 21− 21

11 21− 21−

7.1.3 16QAM In case of 16QAM modulation, quadruplets of bits, )3(),2(),1(),( +++ ibibibib , are mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.3-1.

Table 7.1.3-1: 16QAM modulation mapping

)3(),2(),1(),( +++ ibibibib I Q

0000 101 101

0001 101 103

0010 103 101

0011 103 103

0100 101 101−

0101 101 103−

0110 103 101−

0111 103 103−

1000 101− 101

1001 101− 103

1010 103− 101

1011 103− 103

1100 101− 101−

1101 101− 103−

1110 103− 101−

1111 103− 103−

7.1.4 64QAM In case of 64QAM modulation, hextuplets of bits, )5(),4(),3(),2(),1(),( +++++ ibibibibibib , are mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols x=I+jQ according to Table 7.1.4-1.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)63Release 8

Table 7.1.4-1: 64QAM modulation mapping

)5(),4(),3(),2(),1(),( +++++ ibibibibibib I Q )5(),4(),3(),2(),1(),( +++++ ibibibibibib I Q 000000 423 423 100000 423− 423

000001 423 421 100001 423− 421

000010 421 423 100010 421− 423

000011 421 421 100011 421− 421

000100 423 425 100100 423− 425

000101 423 427 100101 423− 427

000110 421 425 100110 421− 425

000111 421 427 100111 421− 427

001000 425 423 101000 425− 423

001001 425 421 101001 425− 421

001010 427 423 101010 427− 423

001011 427 421 101011 427− 421

001100 425 425 101100 425− 425

001101 425 427 101101 425− 427

001110 427 425 101110 427− 425

001111 427 427 101111 427− 427

010000 423 423− 110000 423− 423−

010001 423 421− 110001 423− 421−

010010 421 423− 110010 421− 423−

010011 421 421− 110011 421− 421−

010100 423 425− 110100 423− 425−

010101 423 427− 110101 423− 427−

010110 421 425− 110110 421− 425−

010111 421 427− 110111 421− 427−

011000 425 423− 111000 425− 423−

011001 425 421− 111001 425− 421−

011010 427 423− 111010 427− 423−

011011 427 421− 111011 427− 421−

011100 425 425− 111100 425− 425−

011101 425 427− 111101 425− 427−

011110 427 425− 111110 427− 425−

011111 427 427− 111111 427− 427−

7.2 Pseudo-random sequence generation Pseudo-random sequences are defined by a length-31 Gold sequence. The output sequence )(nc of length PNM , where 1,...,1,0 PN −= Mn , is defined by

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)64Release 8

( )( )( ) 2mod)()1()2()3()31(

2mod)()3()31(2mod)()()(

22222

111

21

nxnxnxnxnxnxnxnx

nxnxnc

++++++=+++=+

+=

where the first m-sequence shall be initialised with 30,...,2,1,0)(,1)0( 11 === nnxx . The initialisation of the second m-

sequence is denoted by ∑=⋅=

30

0 2init 2)(i

iixc with the value depending on the application of the sequence.

8 Timing

8.1 Uplink-downlink frame timing Transmission of the uplink radio frame number i from the UE shall start sTNTA × seconds before the start of the corresponding downlink radio frame at the UE. Note that not all slots in a radio frame may be transmitted. One example hereof is TDD, where only a subset of the slots in a radio frame is transmitted.

Downlink radio frame #i

Uplink radio frame #i

NTA×TS time units

Figure 8.1-1: Uplink-downlink timing relation

Annex A (informative): Change history

Change history Date TSG # TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Old New 2006-09-24 - - - Draft version created - 0.0.02006-10-09 - - - Updated skeleton 0.0.0 0.0.12006-10-13 - - - Endorsed by RAN1 0.0.1 0.1.02006-10-23 - - - Inclusion of decision from RAN1#46bis 0.1.0 0.1.12006-11-06 - - - Updated editor’s version 0.1.1 0.1.22006-11-09 - - - Updated editor’s version 0.1.2 0.1.32006-11-10 - - - Endorsed by RAN1#47 0.1.3 0.2.02006-11-27 - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#47 0.2.0 0.2.12006-12-14 - - - Updated editor’s version 0.2.1 0.2.22007-01-15 - - - Updated editor’s version 0.2.2 0.2.32007-01-19 - - - Endorsed by RAN1#47bis 0.2.3 0.3.02007-02-01 - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#47bis 0.3.0 0.3.12007-02-12 - - - Updated editor’s version 0.3.1 0.3.22007-02-16 - - - Endorsed by RAN1#48 0.3.2 0.4.02007-02-16 - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#48 0.4.0 0.4.12007-02-21 - - - Updated editor’s version 0.4.1 0.4.22007-03-03 RAN#35 RP-070169 For information at RAN#35 0.4.2 1.0.0

2007-04-25 - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#48bis and RAN1 TDD Ad Hoc 1.0.0 1.0.1

2007-05-03 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.0.1 1.0.22007-05-08 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.0.2 1.0.32007-05-11 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.0.3 1.0.42007-05-11 - - - - Endorsed by RAN1#49 1.0.4 1.1.0

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.211 V8.2.0 (2008-03)65Release 8

2007-05-15 - - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#49 1.1.0 1.1.12007-06-05 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.1.1 1.1.22007-06-25 - - - - Endorsed by RAN1#49bis 1.1.2 1.2.02007-07-10 - - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#49bis 1.2.0 1.2.12007-08-10 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.2.1 1.2.22007-08-20 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.2.2 1.2.32007-08-24 - - - - Endorsed by RAN1#50 1.2.3 1.3.02007-08-27 - - - - Editor’s version, including decisions from RAN1#50 1.3.0 1.3.12007-09-05 - - - - Updated editor’s version 1.3.1 1.3.22007-09-08 RAN#37 RP-070729 - - For approval at RAN#37 1.3.2 2.0.0

12/09/07 RAN_37 RP-070729 Approved version 2.0.0 8.0.028/11/07 RAN_38 RP-070949 0001 - Introduction of optimized FS2 for TDD 8.0.0 8.1.0

28/11/07 RAN_38 RP-070949 0002 - Introduction of scrambling sequences, uplink reference signal sequences, secondary synchronization sequences and control channel processing

8.0.0 8.1.0

05/03/08 RAN_39 RP-080219 0003 1 Update of uplink reference-signal hopping, downlink reference signals, scrambling sequences, DwPTS/UpPTS lengths for TDD and control channel processing

8.1.0 8.2.0



Multiplexing and channel coding(Release 8)

The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification.Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners’ Publications Offices.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)2Release 8

Keywords <keyword[, keyword]>

3GPP

Postal address

3GPP support office address 650 Route des Lucioles – Sophia Antipolis

Valbonne – France Tel. : +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax : +33 4 93 65 47 16






http://www.3gpp.org/

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)3Release 8

Contents Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................5 1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................6 2 References ................................................................................................................................................6 3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................6 3.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.2 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 6 3.3 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 7 4 Mapping to physical channels ..................................................................................................................7 4.1 Uplink ................................................................................................................................................................ 7 4.2 Downlink ........................................................................................................................................................... 7 5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving .......................................................................................8 5.1 Generic procedures ............................................................................................................................................ 8 5.1.1 CRC calculation ........................................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment......................................................................... 9 5.1.3 Channel coding........................................................................................................................................... 10 5.1.3.1 Tail biting convolutional coding........................................................................................................... 11 5.1.3.2 Turbo coding ........................................................................................................................................ 12 5.1.3.2.1 Turbo encoder ................................................................................................................................. 12 5.1.3.2.2 Trellis termination for turbo encoder .............................................................................................. 13 5.1.3.2.3 Turbo code internal interleaver ....................................................................................................... 13 5.1.4 Rate matching............................................................................................................................................. 15 5.1.4.1 Rate matching for turbo coded transport channels ............................................................................... 15 5.1.4.1.1 Sub-block interleaver ...................................................................................................................... 15 5.1.4.1.2 Bit collection, selection and transmission....................................................................................... 16 5.1.4.2 Rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information ........................ 17 5.1.4.2.1 Sub-block interleaver ...................................................................................................................... 18 5.1.4.2.2 Bit collection, selection and transmission....................................................................................... 19 5.1.5 Code block concatenation .......................................................................................................................... 19 5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information ......................................................................................... 20 5.2.1 Random access channel.............................................................................................................................. 20 5.2.2 Uplink shared channel................................................................................................................................ 20 5.2.2.1 Transport block CRC attachment ......................................................................................................... 21 5.2.2.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment ................................................................. 21 5.2.2.3 Channel coding of UL-SCH ................................................................................................................. 22 5.2.2.4 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 22 5.2.2.5 Code block concatenation..................................................................................................................... 22 5.2.2.6 Channel coding of control information................................................................................................. 22 5.2.2.7 Data and control multiplexing .............................................................................................................. 23 5.2.2.8 Channel interleaver............................................................................................................................... 24 5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUCCH ..................................................................................................... 25 5.2.3.1 Channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK.................................................................................................. 25 5.2.3.2 Channel coding for UCI scheduling request......................................................................................... 25 5.2.3.3 Channel coding for UCI channel quality information .......................................................................... 26 5.2.3.3.1 Channel quality information formats for wideband reports ............................................................ 26 5.2.3.3.2 Channel quality information formats for UE-selected sub-band reports......................................... 27 5.2.3.4 Channel coding for UCI channel quality information and HARQ-ACK.............................................. 28 5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information..................................................................................... 29 5.3.1 Broadcast channel ...................................................................................................................................... 29 5.3.1.1 Transport block CRC attachment ......................................................................................................... 29 5.3.1.2 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 30 5.3.1.3 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 30 5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel............................................................. 30 5.3.2.1 Transport block CRC attachment ......................................................................................................... 31 5.3.2.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment ................................................................. 31

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)4Release 8

5.3.2.3 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 31 5.3.2.4 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 32 5.3.2.5 Code block concatenation..................................................................................................................... 32 5.3.3 Downlink control information.................................................................................................................... 32 5.3.3.1 DCI formats .......................................................................................................................................... 33 5.3.3.1.1 Format 0.......................................................................................................................................... 33 5.3.3.1.2 Format 1.......................................................................................................................................... 34 5.3.3.1.3 Format 1A....................................................................................................................................... 34 5.3.3.1.4 Format 2.......................................................................................................................................... 35 5.3.3.1.5 Format 3.......................................................................................................................................... 35 5.3.3.1.6 Format 3A....................................................................................................................................... 36 5.3.3.2 CRC attachment.................................................................................................................................... 36 5.3.3.3 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 36 5.3.3.4 Rate matching....................................................................................................................................... 36 5.3.4 Control format indicator............................................................................................................................. 36 5.3.4.1 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 37 5.3.5 HARQ indicator ......................................................................................................................................... 37 5.3.5.1 Channel coding..................................................................................................................................... 37

Annex <X> (informative): Change history ...............................................................................................38

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)5Release 8



Version x.y.z

where:

x the first digit:




Y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc.


3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)6Release 8

1 Scope The present document specifies the coding, multiplexing and mapping to physical channels for E-UTRA.






[2] 3GPP TS 36.211: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation".

[3] 3GPP TS 36.213: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures".


3.1 Definitions For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in [1].

Definition format

<defined term>: <definition>.


DLRBN Downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in number of resource blocks [2] ULRBN Uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in number of resource blocks [2] PUSCHsymbN Number of SC-FDMA symbols carrying PUSCH in a subframe ULsymbN Number of SC-FDMA symbols in an uplink slot

SRSN Number of SC-FDMA symbols used for SRS transmission in a subframe (0 or 1).

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)7Release 8

3.3 Abbreviations For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply:

BCH Broadcast channel CFI Control Format Indicator CP Cyclic Prefix DCI Downlink Control Information DL-SCH Downlink Shared channel FDD Frequency Division Duplexing HI HARQ indicator MCH Multicast channel PBCH Physical Broadcast channel PCFICH Physical Control Format Indicator channel PCH Paging channel PDCCH Physical Downlink Control channel PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared channel PHICH Physical HARQ indicator channel PMCH Physical Multicast channel PRACH Physical Random Access channel PUCCH Physical Uplink Control channel PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared channel RACH Random Access channel SRS Sounding Reference Signal TDD Time Division Duplexing UCI Uplink Control Information UL-SCH Uplink Shared channel

4 Mapping to physical channels

4.1 Uplink Table 4.1-1 specifies the mapping of the uplink transport channels to their corresponding physical channels. Table 4.1-2 specifies the mapping of the uplink control channel information to its corresponding physical channel.

Table 4.1-1

TrCH Physical Channel UL-SCH PUSCH RACH PRACH

Table 4.1-2

Control information Physical Channel UCI PUCCH, PUSCH

4.2 Downlink Table 4.2-1 specifies the mapping of the downlink transport channels to their corresponding physical channels. Table 4.2-2 specifies the mapping of the downlink control channel information to its corresponding physical channel.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)8Release 8

Table 4.2-1

TrCH Physical Channel DL-SCH PDSCH BCH PBCH PCH PDSCH MCH PMCH

Table 4.2-2

Control information Physical Channel CFI PCFICH HI PHICH DCI PDCCH

5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving Data and control streams from/to MAC layer are encoded /decoded to offer transport and control services over the radio transmission link. Channel coding scheme is a combination of error detection, error correcting, rate matching, interleaving and transport channel or control information mapping onto/splitting from physical channels.

5.1 Generic procedures This section contains coding procedures which are used for more than one transport channel or control information type.

5.1.1 CRC calculation Denote the input bits to the CRC computation by 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa , and the parity bits by 13210 ,...,,,, −Lppppp . A is the size of the input sequence and L is the number of parity bits. The parity bits are generated by one of the following cyclic generator polynomials:

- gCRC24A(D) = [D24 + D23 + D18 + D17 + D14 + D11 + D10 + D7 + D6 + D5 + D4 + D3 + D + 1] and;

- gCRC24B(D) = [D24 + D23 + D6 + D5 + D + 1] for a CRC length L = 24 and;

- gCRC16(D) = [D16 + D12 + D5 + 1] for a CRC length L = 16.

The encoding is performed in a systematic form, which means that in GF(2), the polynomial:

231

2222

123

024

122

123

0 ...... pDpDpDpDaDaDa AAA ++++++++ −++

yields a remainder equal to 0 when divided by the corresponding length-24 CRC generator polynomial, gCRC24A(D) or gCRC24B(D), and the polynomial:

151

1414

115

016

114

115

0 ...... pDpDpDpDaDaDa AAA ++++++++ −++

yields a remainder equal to 0 when divided by gCRC16(D).

The bits after CRC attachment are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb , where B = A+ L. The relation between ak and bk is:

kk ab = for k = 0, 1, 2, …, A-1

Akk pb −= for k = A, A+1, A+2,..., A+L-1.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)9Release 8

5.1.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment The input bit sequence to the code block segmentation is denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb , where B > 0. If B is larger than the maximum code block size Z, segmentation of the input bit sequence is performed and an additional CRC sequence of L = 24 bits is attached to each code block. The maximum code block size is:

- Z = 6144.

If the number of filler bits F calculated below is not 0, filler bits are added to the beginning of the first block.

Note that if B < 40, filler bits are added to the beginning of the code block.

The filler bits shall be set to <NULL> at the input to the encoder.

Total number of code blocks C is determined by:

if ZB ≤

L = 0

Number of code blocks: 1=C

BB =′

else

L = 24

Number of code blocks: ( )⎡ ⎤LZBC −= / .

LCBB ⋅+=′

end if

The bits output from code block segmentation, for C ≠ 0, are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rKrrrrr ccccc , where r is the code block number, and Kr is the number of bits for the code block number r.

Number of bits in each code block (applicable for C ≠ 0 only):

First segmentation size: +K = minimum K in table 5.1.3-3 such that BKC ′≥⋅

if 1=C

the number of code blocks with length +K is +C =1, 0=−K , 0=−C

else if 1>C

Second segmentation size: −K = maximum K in table 5.1.3-3 such that +< KK

−+ −=Δ KKK

Number of segments of size −K : ⎥⎦

⎥⎢⎣

⎢Δ

′−⋅= +

−K

BKCC .

Number of segments of size +K : −+ −= CCC .

end if

Number of filler bits: BKCKCF ′−⋅+⋅= −−++

for k = 0 to F-1 -- Insertion of filler bits

>=< NULLc k0

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)10Release 8

end for

k = F

s = 0

for r = 0 to C-1

if −< Cr

−= KK r

else

+= KK r

end if

while LKk r −<

srk bc =

1+= kk

1+= ss

end while

if C >1

The sequence ( )13210 ,...,,,, −−LKrrrrr rccccc is used to calculate the CRC parity bits ( )1210 ,...,,, −Lrrrr pppp

according to subclause 5.1.1 with the generator polynomial gCRC24B(D). For CRC calculation it is assumed that filler bits, if present, have the value 0. while rKk <

)( rKLkrrk pc −+= 1+= kk

end while end if

0=k

end for

5.1.3 Channel coding The bit sequence input for a given code block to channel coding is denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Kccccc , where K is the

number of bits to encode. After encoding the bits are denoted by )(1

)(3

)(2

)(1

)(0 ,...,,,, i

Diiii ddddd − , where D is the number of

encoded bits per output stream and i indexes the encoder output stream. The relation between kc and )(ikd and between

K and D is dependent on the channel coding scheme.

The following channel coding schemes can be applied to TrCHs:

- tail biting convolutional coding;

- turbo coding.

Usage of coding scheme and coding rate for the different types of TrCH is shown in table 5.1.3-1. Usage of coding scheme and coding rate for the different control information types is shown in table 5.1.3-2.

The values of D in connection with each coding scheme:

- tail biting convolutional coding with rate 1/3: D = K;

Administrator

Highlight

咬尾卷积编码，码率1/3，D=K

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)11Release 8

- turbo coding with rate 1/3: D = K + 4.

The range for the output stream index i is 0, 1 and 2 for both coding schemes.

Table 5.1.3-1: Usage of channel coding scheme and coding rate for TrCHs

TrCH Coding scheme Coding rate UL-SCH DL-SCH

PCH MCH

Turbo coding 1/3

BCH Tail biting

convolutional coding

1/3

Table 5.1.3-2: Usage of channel coding scheme and coding rate for control information

Control Information Coding scheme Coding rate

DCI Tail biting

convolutional coding

1/3

CFI Block code 1/16 HI Repetition code 1/3

Block code variable

UCI Tail biting convolutional

coding 1/3

5.1.3.1 Tail biting convolutional coding

A tail biting convolutional code with constraint length 7 and coding rate 1/3 is defined.

The configuration of the convolutional encoder is presented in figure 5.1.3-1.

The initial value of the shift register of the encoder shall be set to the values corresponding to the last 6 information bits in the input stream so that the initial and final states of the shift register are the same. Therefore, denoting the shift register of the encoder by 5210 ,...,,, ssss , then the initial value of the shift register shall be set to

( )iKi cs −−= 1

kc

)0(kd

)1(kd

)2(kd

Figure 5.1.3-1: Rate 1/3 tail biting convolutional encoder

The encoder output streams )0(kd , )1(

kd and )2(kd correspond to the first, second and third parity streams, respectively as

shown in Figure 5.1.3-1.

Administrator

Highlight

Turbo编码，码率1/3，D=K+4

Administrator

Highlight

移位寄存器的初始状态和最终状态是一致的

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)12Release 8

5.1.3.2 Turbo coding

5.1.3.2.1 Turbo encoder

The scheme of turbo encoder is a Parallel Concatenated Convolutional Code (PCCC) with two 8-state constituent encoders and one turbo code internal interleaver. The coding rate of turbo encoder is 1/3. The structure of turbo encoder is illustrated in figure 5.1.3-2.

The transfer function of the 8-state constituent code for the PCCC is:

G(D) = ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡)(

)(,1

0

1

Dg

Dg,

where

g0(D) = 1 + D2 + D3, g1(D) = 1 + D + D3.

The initial value of the shift registers of the 8-state constituent encoders shall be all zeros when starting to encode the input bits.

The output from the turbo encoder is

kk xd =)0(

kk zd =)1(

kk zd ′=)2(

for 1,...,2,1,0 −= Kk .

If the code block to be encoded is the 0-th code block and the number of filler bits is greater than zero, i.e., F > 0, then the encoder shall set ck, = 0, k = 0,…,(F-1) at its input and shall set >=< NULLd k

)0( , k = 0,…,(F-1) and

>=< NULLd k)1( , k = 0,…,(F-1) at its output.

The bits input to the turbo encoder are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Kccccc , and the bits output from the first and second 8-state constituent encoders are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Kzzzzz and 13210 ,...,,,, −′′′′′ Kzzzzz , respectively. The bits output from the turbo code internal interleaver are denoted by 110 ,...,, −′′′ Kccc , and these bits are to be the input to the second 8-state constituent encoder.

Administrator

Highlight

并行级联卷积码

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)13Release 8

kc

kc′

kx′

kx

kz

kz′

Figure 5.1.3-2: Structure of rate 1/3 turbo encoder (dotted lines apply for trellis termination only)

5.1.3.2.2 Trellis termination for turbo encoder

Trellis termination is performed by taking the tail bits from the shift register feedback after all information bits are encoded. Tail bits are padded after the encoding of information bits.

The first three tail bits shall be used to terminate the first constituent encoder (upper switch of figure 5.1.3-2 in lower position) while the second constituent encoder is disabled. The last three tail bits shall be used to terminate the second constituent encoder (lower switch of figure 5.1.3-2 in lower position) while the first constituent encoder is disabled.

The transmitted bits for trellis termination shall then be:

KK xd =)0( , 1)0(1 ++ = KK zd , KK xd ′=+

)0(2 , 1

)0(3 ++ ′= KK zd

KK zd =)1( , 2)1(

1 ++ = KK xd , KK zd ′=+)1(

2 , 2)1(

3 ++ ′= KK xd

1)2(

+= KK xd , 2)2(1 ++ = KK zd , 1

)2(2 ++ ′= KK xd , 2

)2(3 ++ ′= KK zd

5.1.3.2.3 Turbo code internal interleaver

The bits input to the turbo code internal interleaver are denoted by 110 ,...,, −Kccc , where K is the number of input bits. The bits output from the turbo code internal interleaver are denoted by 110 ,...,, −′′′ Kccc .

The relationship between the input and output bits is as follows:

( )ii cc Π=′ , i=0, 1,…, (K-1)

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)14Release 8

where the relationship between the output index i and the input index )(iΠ satisfies the following quadratic form:

( ) Kififi mod)( 221 ⋅+⋅=Π

The parameters 1f and 2f depend on the block size K and are summarized in Table 5.1.3-3.

Table 5.1.3-3: Turbo code internal interleaver parameters

i Ki 1f 2f i Ki 1f 2f i Ki 1f 2f i Ki 1f 2f1 40 3 10 48 416 25 52 95 1120 67 140 142 3200 111 2402 48 7 12 49 424 51 106 96 1152 35 72 143 3264 443 2043 56 19 42 50 432 47 72 97 1184 19 74 144 3328 51 1044 64 7 16 51 440 91 110 98 1216 39 76 145 3392 51 2125 72 7 18 52 448 29 168 99 1248 19 78 146 3456 451 1926 80 11 20 53 456 29 114 100 1280 199 240 147 3520 257 2207 88 5 22 54 464 247 58 101 1312 21 82 148 3584 57 3368 96 11 24 55 472 29 118 102 1344 211 252 149 3648 313 2289 104 7 26 56 480 89 180 103 1376 21 86 150 3712 271 23210 112 41 84 57 488 91 122 104 1408 43 88 151 3776 179 23611 120 103 90 58 496 157 62 105 1440 149 60 152 3840 331 12012 128 15 32 59 504 55 84 106 1472 45 92 153 3904 363 24413 136 9 34 60 512 31 64 107 1504 49 846 154 3968 375 24814 144 17 108 61 528 17 66 108 1536 71 48 155 4032 127 16815 152 9 38 62 544 35 68 109 1568 13 28 156 4096 31 6416 160 21 120 63 560 227 420 110 1600 17 80 157 4160 33 13017 168 101 84 64 576 65 96 111 1632 25 102 158 4224 43 26418 176 21 44 65 592 19 74 112 1664 183 104 159 4288 33 13419 184 57 46 66 608 37 76 113 1696 55 954 160 4352 477 40820 192 23 48 67 624 41 234 114 1728 127 96 161 4416 35 13821 200 13 50 68 640 39 80 115 1760 27 110 162 4480 233 28022 208 27 52 69 656 185 82 116 1792 29 112 163 4544 357 14223 216 11 36 70 672 43 252 117 1824 29 114 164 4608 337 48024 224 27 56 71 688 21 86 118 1856 57 116 165 4672 37 14625 232 85 58 72 704 155 44 119 1888 45 354 166 4736 71 44426 240 29 60 73 720 79 120 120 1920 31 120 167 4800 71 12027 248 33 62 74 736 139 92 121 1952 59 610 168 4864 37 15228 256 15 32 75 752 23 94 122 1984 185 124 169 4928 39 46229 264 17 198 76 768 217 48 123 2016 113 420 170 4992 127 23430 272 33 68 77 784 25 98 124 2048 31 64 171 5056 39 15831 280 103 210 78 800 17 80 125 2112 17 66 172 5120 39 8032 288 19 36 79 816 127 102 126 2176 171 136 173 5184 31 9633 296 19 74 80 832 25 52 127 2240 209 420 174 5248 113 90234 304 37 76 81 848 239 106 128 2304 253 216 175 5312 41 16635 312 19 78 82 864 17 48 129 2368 367 444 176 5376 251 33636 320 21 120 83 880 137 110 130 2432 265 456 177 5440 43 17037 328 21 82 84 896 215 112 131 2496 181 468 178 5504 21 8638 336 115 84 85 912 29 114 132 2560 39 80 179 5568 43 17439 344 193 86 86 928 15 58 133 2624 27 164 180 5632 45 17640 352 21 44 87 944 147 118 134 2688 127 504 181 5696 45 17841 360 133 90 88 960 29 60 135 2752 143 172 182 5760 161 12042 368 81 46 89 976 59 122 136 2816 43 88 183 5824 89 18243 376 45 94 90 992 65 124 137 2880 29 300 184 5888 323 18444 384 23 48 91 1008 55 84 138 2944 45 92 185 5952 47 18645 392 243 98 92 1024 31 64 139 3008 157 188 186 6016 23 9446 400 151 40 93 1056 17 66 140 3072 47 96 187 6080 47 19047 408 155 102 94 1088 171 204 141 3136 13 28 188 6144 263 480

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)15Release 8

5.1.4 Rate matching

5.1.4.1 Rate matching for turbo coded transport channels

The rate matching for turbo coded transport channels is defined per coded block and consists of interleaving the three information bit streams )0(

kd , )1(kd and )2(

kd , followed by the collection of bits and the generation of a circular buffer as depicted in Figure 5.1.4-1. The output bits for each code block are transmitted as described in subclause 5.1.4.1.2.

)0(kd

)1(kd

)2(kd

ke

)0(kv

)1(kv

)2(kv

kw

Figure 5.1.4-1. Rate matching for turbo coded transport channels

The bit stream )0(kd is interleaved according to the sub-block interleaver defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1 with an output

sequence defined as )0(1

)0(2

)0(1

)0(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv and where ΠK is defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1.



)1(2

)1(1

)1(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv .



)2(2

)2(1

)2(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv .

The sequence of bits ke for transmission is generated according to subclause 5.1.4.1.2.

5.1.4.1.1 Sub-block interleaver

The bits input to the block interleaver are denoted by )(1

)(2

)(1

)(0 ,...,,, i

Diii dddd − , where D is the number of bits. The output

bit sequence from the block interleaver is derived as follows:

(1) Assign 32=TCsubblockC to be the number of columns of the matrix. The columns of the matrix are numbered 0, 1,

2,…, 1−TCsubblockC from left to right.

(2) Determine the number of rows of the matrix TCsubblockR , by finding minimum integer TC

subblockR such that:

( )TCsubblock

TCsubblock CRD ×≤

The rows of rectangular matrix are numbered 0, 1, 2,…, 1−TCsubblockR from top to bottom.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)16Release 8

(3) If ( ) DCR TCsubblock

TCsubblock >× , then ( )DCRN TC

subblockTCsubblockD −×= dummy bits are padded such that yk = <NULL>

for k = 0, 1,…, ND - 1. Then, write the input bit sequence, i.e. )(ikkN dy

D=+ , k = 0, 1,…, D-1, into

the ( )TCsubblock

TCsubblock CR × matrix row by row starting with bit y0 in column 0 of row 0:

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−×+×−+×−×−

−++

−

)1(2)1(1)1()1(

1221

1210

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

CRCRCRCR

CCCC

C

yyyy

yyyyyyyy

For )0(kd and )1(

kd :

(4) Perform the inter-column permutation for the matrix based on the pattern ( ) { }1,...,1,0 −∈ TCsubblockCjjP that is shown in

table 5.1.4-1, where P(j) is the original column position of the j-th permuted column. After permutation of the columns, the inter-column permuted ( )TC

subblockTCsubblock CR × matrix is equal to

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

×−+−×−+×−+×−+

+−+++

−

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

TCsubblock

CRCPCRPCRPCRP

CCPCPCPCP

CPPPP

yyyy

yyyyyyyy

)1()1()1()2()1()1()1()0(

)1()2()1()0(

)1()2()1()0(

(5) The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the inter-column permuted ( )TC

subblockTCsubblock CR × matrix. The bits after sub-block interleaving are denoted by )(

1)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,, iK

iii vvvv −Π,

where )(0iv corresponds to )0(Py , )(

1iv to TC

subblockCPy

+)0(… and ( )TC

subblockTCsubblock CRK ×=Π .

For )2(kd :

(4) The output of the sub-block interleaver is denoted by )2(1

)2(2

)2(1

)2(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv , where )(

)2(kk yv π= and where

( ) Π⎟⎟

⎠

⎞

⎜⎜

⎝

⎛+×+

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

⎥⎥⎦

⎥

⎢⎢⎣

⎢= KRkC

RkPk TC

subblockTCsubblockTC

subblockmod1mod)(π

The permutation function P is defined in Table 5.1.4-1.

Table 5.1.4-1 Inter-column permutation pattern for sub-block interleaver

Number of columns TCsubblockC

Inter-column permutation pattern >−< )1(),...,1(),0( TC

subblockCPPP

32 < 0, 16, 8, 24, 4, 20, 12, 28, 2, 18, 10, 26, 6, 22, 14, 30, 1, 17, 9, 25, 5, 21, 13, 29, 3, 19, 11, 27, 7, 23, 15, 31 >

5.1.4.1.2 Bit collection, selection and transmission

The circular buffer of length Π= KK w 3 for the r-th coded block is generated as follows:

)0(kk vw = for k = 0,…, 1−ΠK

)1(2 kkK vw =+Π

for k = 0,…, 1−ΠK

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)17Release 8

)2(12 kkK vw =++Π

for k = 0,…, 1−ΠK

Denote the soft buffer size for the transport block by NIR bits and the soft buffer size for the r-th code block by Ncb bits. NIR is signalled by higher layers. The size Ncb is obtained as follows, where C is the number of code blocks computed in subclause 5.1.2:

- ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛⎥⎦⎥

⎢⎣⎢= w

IRcb K

CNN ,min for downlink turbo coded transport channels

- wcb KN = for uplink turbo coded transport channels

Denoting by E the rate matching output sequence length for the r-th coded block, and rvidx the redundancy version number for this transmission (rvidx = 0, 1, 2 or 3), the rate matching output bit sequence is ke , k = 0,1,..., 1−E .

Define by G the total number of bits available for the transmission of one transport block.

Set ( )mL QNGG ⋅=′ where Qm is equal to 2 for QPSK, 4 for 16QAM and 6 for 64QAM, and where NL is equal to 1 for blocks mapped onto one transmission layer and is equal to 2 for blocks mapped onto two or four transmission layers.

Set CG mod′=γ , where C is the number of code blocks computed in subclause 5.1.2.

if 1−−≤ γCr

set ⎣ ⎦CGQNE mL /′⋅⋅=

else

set ⎡ ⎤CGQNE mL /′⋅⋅=

end if

Set⎟⎟

⎠

⎞

⎜⎜

⎝

⎛+⋅

⎥⎥⎥

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎡⋅⋅= 2

820 idxTC

subblock

cbTCsubblock rv

RN

Rk , where TCsubblockR is the number of rows defined in subclause 5.1.4.1.1.

Set k = 0 and j = 0

while { k < E }

if >≠<+ NULLwcbNjk mod)( 0

cbNjkk we mod)( 0+=

k = k +1

end if

j = j +1

end while

5.1.4.2 Rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information

The rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information consists of interleaving the three bit streams, )0(

kd , )1(kd and )2(

kd , followed by the collection of bits and the generation of a circular buffer as depicted in Figure 5.1.4-2. The output bits are transmitted as described in subclause 5.1.4.2.2.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)18Release 8

)0(kd

)1(kd

)2(kd

ke

)0(kv

)1(kv

)2(kv

kw

Figure 5.1.4-2. Rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information



)0(2

)0(1

)0(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv and where ΠK is defined in subclause 5.1.4.2.1.



)1(2

)1(1

)1(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv .



)2(2

)2(1

)2(0 ,...,,, −ΠKvvvv .

The sequence of bits ke for transmission is generated according to subclause 5.1.4.2.2.

5.1.4.2.1 Sub-block interleaver

The bits input to the block interleaver are denoted by )(1

)(2

)(1

)(0 ,...,,, i

Diii dddd − , where D is the number of bits. The output

bit sequence from the block interleaver is derived as follows:

(1) Assign 32=CCsubblockC to be the number of columns of the matrix. The columns of the matrix are numbered 0, 1,

2,…, 1−CCsubblockC from left to right.

(2) Determine the number of rows of the matrix CCsubblockR , by finding minimum integer CC

subblockR such that:

( )CCsubblock

CCsubblock CRD ×≤

The rows of rectangular matrix are numbered 0, 1, 2,…, 1−CCsubblockR from top to bottom.

(3) If ( ) DCR CCsubblock

CCsubblock >× , then ( )DCRN CC

subblockCCsubblockD −×= dummy bits are padded such that yk = <NULL>

for k = 0, 1,…, ND - 1. Then, write the input bit sequence, i.e. )(ikkN dy

D=+ , k = 0, 1,…, D-1, into

the ( )CCsubblock

CCsubblock CR × matrix row by row starting with bit y0 in column 0 of row 0:

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−×+×−+×−×−

−++

−

)1(2)1(1)1()1(

1221

1210

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CRCRCRCR

CCCC

C

yyyy

yyyy

yyyy

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)19Release 8

(4) Perform the inter-column permutation for the matrix based on the pattern ( ) { }1,...,1,0 −∈ CCsubblockCjjP that is shown in

table 5.1.4-2, where P(j) is the original column position of the j-th permuted column. After permutation of the columns, the inter-column permuted ( )CC

subblockCCsubblock CR × matrix is equal to

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

×−+−×−+×−+×−+

+−+++

−

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CCsubblock

CRCPCRPCRPCRP

CCPCPCPCP

CPPPP

yyyy

yyyyyyyy

)1()1()1()2()1()1()1()0(

)1()2()1()0(

)1()2()1()0(

(5) The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the inter-column permuted ( )CC

subblockCCsubblock CR × matrix. The bits after sub-block interleaving are denoted by )(

1)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,, iK

iii vvvv −Π,

where )(0iv corresponds to )0(Py , )(

1iv to CC

subblockCPy

+)0(… and ( )CC

subblockCCsubblock CRK ×=Π

Table 5.1.4-2 Inter-column permutation pattern for sub-block interleaver

Number of columns CCsubblockC

Inter-column permutation pattern >−< )1(),...,1(),0( CC

subblockCPPP

32 < 1, 17, 9, 25, 5, 21, 13, 29, 3, 19, 11, 27, 7, 23, 15, 31, 0, 16, 8, 24, 4, 20, 12, 28, 2, 18, 10, 26, 6, 22, 14, 30 >

5.1.4.2.2 Bit collection, selection and transmission

The circular buffer of length Π= KK w 3 is generated as follows:

)0(kk vw = for k = 0,…, 1−ΠK

)1(kkK vw =+Π

for k = 0,…, 1−ΠK

)2(2 kkK vw =+Π

for k = 0,…, 1−ΠK

Denoting by E the rate matching output sequence length, the rate matching output bit sequence is ke , k = 0,1,..., 1−E .

Set k = 0 and j = 0

while { k < E }

if >≠< NULLwwKj mod

wKjk we mod=

k = k +1

end if

j = j +1

end while

5.1.5 Code block concatenation The input bit sequence for the code block concatenation and channel interleaving block are the sequences rke , for

1,...,0 −= Cr and 1,...,0 −= rEk . The output bit sequence from the code block concatenation and channel interleaving block is the sequence kf for 1,...,0 −= Gk .

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)20Release 8

The code block concatenation consists of sequentially concatenating the rate matching outputs for the different code blocks. Therefore,

Set 0=k and 0=r

while Cr <

Set 0=j

while rEj <

rjk ef =

1+= kk

1+= jj

end while

1+= rr

end while

5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information

5.2.1 Random access channel The sequence index for the random access channel is received from higher layers and is processed according to [2].

5.2.2 Uplink shared channel Figure 5.2.2-1 shows the processing structure for the UL-SCH transport channel. Data arrives to the coding unit in form of a maximum of one transport block every transmission time interval (TTI). The following coding steps can be identified:

− Add CRC to the transport block

− Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment

− Channel coding of data and control information

− Rate matching

− Code block concatenation

− Multiplexing of data and control information

− Channel interleaver

The coding steps for UL-SCH transport channel are shown in the figure below.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)21Release 8

Transport block CRC attachment

Code block segmentationCode block CRC attachment

Channel coding

Rate matching

Code block concatenation

Data and Control multiplexing

Channel coding

110 ,...,, −Aaaa

110 ,...,, −Bbbb

( )110 ,...,, −rKrrr ccc

( ))(

1)(

1)(

0 ,...,, iDr

ir

ir r

ddd −

( )110 ,...,, −rErrr eee

110 ,...,, −Gfff

110 ,...,, −Hggg

110 ,...,, −Oooo

110 ,...,, −Qqqq

Channel interleaver

110 ,...,, −Hhhh

Channel coding

ACKQ

ACKACKACK

qqq 110 ,...,, −

] [or ][ 010ACKACKACK ooo

Figure 5.2.2-1: Transport channel processing for UL-SCH

5.2.2.1 Transport block CRC attachment

Error detection is provided on UL-SCH transport blocks through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).

The entire transport block is used to calculate the CRC parity bits. Denote the bits in a transport block delivered to layer 1 by 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa , and the parity bits by 13210 ,...,,,, −Lppppp . A is the size of the transport block and L is the number of parity bits.

The parity bits are computed and attached to the UL-SCH transport block according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to 24 bits and using the generator polynomial gCRC24A(D).

5.2.2.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment

The bits input to the code block segmentation are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb where B is the number of bits in the transport block (including CRC).

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)22Release 8

Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment are performed according to subclause 5.1.2.

The bits after code block segmentation are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rKrrrrr ccccc , where r is the code block number and Kr is the number of bits for code block number r.

5.2.2.3 Channel coding of UL-SCH

Code blocks are delivered to the channel coding block. The bits in a code block are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rKrrrrr ccccc , where r is the code block number, and Kr is the number of bits in code block number r.

The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each code block is individually turbo encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.2.

After encoding the bits are denoted by ( ))(

1)(

3)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,,, iDr

ir

ir

ir

ir r

ddddd − , with 2 and ,1,0=i and where rD is the number of

bits on the i-th coded stream for code block number r, i.e. 4+= rr KD .

5.2.2.4 Rate matching

Turbo coded blocks are delivered to the rate matching block. They are denoted by ( ))(

1)(

3)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,,, iDr

ir

ir

ir

ir r

ddddd − ,

with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where r is the code block number, i is the coded stream index, and rD is the number of bits in each coded stream of code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each coded block is individually rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.1.

After rate matching, the bits are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rErrrrr eeeee , where r is the coded block number, and where

rE is the number of rate matched bits for code block number r.

5.2.2.5 Code block concatenation

The bits input to the code block concatenation block are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rErrrrr eeeee for 1,...,0 −= Cr and

where rE is the number of rate matched bits for the r-th code block.

Code block concatenation is performed according to subclause 5.1.5.

The bits after code block concatenation are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Gfffff , where G is the total number of coded bits for transmission excluding the bits used for control transmission, when control information is multiplexed with the UL-SCH transmission.

5.2.2.6 Channel coding of control information

The coding rate of the control information when multiplexed with the data transmission is given by the modulation scheme and the coding rate used for the UL-SCH transmission. Different coding rates for the control information are achieved by allocating different number of coded symbols for its transmission.

When multiplexed with the data transmission in the uplink shared data channel, the channel coding for HARQ-ACK and channel quality information 1210 ,...,,, −Ooooo is done independently.

For HARQ-ACK information

− If HARQ-ACK consists of 1-bit of information, i.e., ][ 0ACKo , it is first encoded according to Table 5.2.2-1.

− If HARQ-ACK consists of 2-bits of information, i.e., ] [ 01ACKACK oo , it is first encoded according to Table

5.2.2-2.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)23Release 8

Table 5.2.2-1: Encoding of 1-bit HARQ-ACK

Qm Encoded HARQ-ACK2 x][ 0

ACKo 4 x x x][ 0

ACKo 6 ] x x x x x[ 0

ACKo

Table 5.2.2-2: Encoding of 2-bit HARQ-ACK

Qm Encoded HARQ-ACK2 ] [ 01

ACKACK oo 4 x x] [ 01

ACKACK oo 6 x x x x] [ 01

ACKACK oo

[Note from the editor: the ‘x’ above is a placeholder for 211 to treat bits with this value differently when performing scrambling of coded bits. This will enable limiting the constellation size used for ACK transmission in PUSCH to QPSK.]

The bit sequence ACKQ

ACKACKACKACK

qqqq 1210 ,...,,, − is obtained by concatenation of multiple encoded HARQ-ACK blocks

where ACKQ is the total number of coded bit for all the encoded HARQ-ACK blocks. The vector sequence output of

the channel coding for HARQ-ACK information is denoted by ACKQ

ACKACK

ACKqqq

110,...,,

−′, where mACKACK QQQ /=′ , and

is obtained as follows:

Set i ,k to 0

while ACKQi <

TACKQi

ACKi

ACKk m

qqq ]... [ 1−+=

mQii +=

1+= kk

end while

For channel quality control information

− If the payload size is less than or equal to 11 bits, the channel coding of the channel quality information is performed according to subclause 5.2.3.3 with input sequence 1210 ,...,,, −Ooooo .

− For payload sizes greater than 11 bits, the channel coding and rate matching of the channel quality information is performed according to subclause 5.1.3.1 and 5.1.4.2 with input sequence 1210 ,...,,, −Ooooo .

The output sequence for the channel coding of channel quality information is denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Qqqqqq .

5.2.2.7 Data and control multiplexing

The control and data multiplexing is performed such that HARQ-ACK information is present on both slots and is mapped to resources around the demodulation reference signals. In addition, the multiplexing ensures that control and data information are mapped to different modulation symbols.

The inputs to the data and control multiplexing are the coded bits of the control information denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Qqqqqq and the coded bits of the UL-SCH denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Gfffff . The output of the data and

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)24Release 8

control multiplexing operation is denoted by 13210

,...,,,,−′H

ggggg , where ( )QGH += and mQHH /=′ , and

wherei

g , 1,...,0 −′= Hi are column vectors of length mQ . H is the total number of coded bits for transmission.

Denote the number of SC-FDMA symbols per subframe for PUSCH transmission by ( )( )SRSNNN −−⋅= 12 ULsymb

PUSCHsymb .

The control information and the data shall be multiplexed as follows:

Set i, j, k to 0

while Qj < -- first place the control information

TQjjk m

qqg ] ... [ 1−+=

mQjj +=

1+= kk

end while

while Gi < -- then place the data

TQiik m

ffg ] ... [ 1−+=

mQii +=

1+= kk

end while

5.2.2.8 Channel interleaver

The channel interleaver described in this subclause in conjunction with the resource element mapping for PUSCH in [2] implements a time-first mapping of modulation symbols onto the transmit waveform while ensuring that the HARQ-ACK information is present on both slots in the subframe and is mapped to resources around the uplink demodulation reference signals.

The bits input to the channel interleaver are denoted by 1210

,...,,,−′H

gggg , where H ′ is the number of modulation

symbols in the subframe. The output bit sequence from the channel interleaver is derived as follows:

(1) Assign PUSCHsymbNCmux = to be the number of columns of the matrix. The columns of the matrix are numbered 0,

1, 2,…, 1−muxC from left to right.

(2) The number of rows of the matrix is muxmux CHR /= and we define mmuxmux QRR /=′ .

The rows of the rectangular matrix are numbered 0, 1, 2,…, 1−muxR from top to bottom.

(3) Write the input vector sequence, i.e., kk

gy = for k = 0, 1,…, 1−′H , into the ( )muxmux CR × matrix by sets of

Qm rows starting with the vector 0

y in column 0 and rows 0 to ( )1−mQ :

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)25Release 8

⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

−×′+×−′+×−′×−′

−++

−

)1(2)1(1)1()1(

1221

1210

muxmuxmuxmuxmuxmuxmuxmux

muxmuxmuxmux

mux

CRCRCRCR

CCCC

C

yyyy

yyyy

yyyy

(4) If HARQ-ACK information is transmitted in this subframe, the vector sequence ACKQ

ACKACKACK

ACKqqqq

1210,...,,,

−′

is written onto the columns indicated by Table 5.2.2.8-1, and by sets of Qm rows starting from the last row and moving upwards. Note that this operation overwrites some of the channel interleaver entries obtained in step (3).

(5)The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from the ( )muxmux CR × matrix.

The bits after channel interleaving are denoted by 1210 ,...,,, −Hhhhh .

Table 5.2.2.8-1: Column set for Insertion of HARQ-ACK information

CP configuration SRS configuration Column Set No SRS {2, 3, 8, 9} First SC-FDMA symbol {1, 2, 7, 8} Normal Last SC-FDMA symbol {2, 3, 8, 9} No SRS {2, 3, 7, 8} First SC-FDMA symbol {1, 2, 6, 7} Extended Last SC-FDMA symbol {2, 3, 7, 8}

5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUCCH Data arrives to the coding unit in form of indicators for measurement indication, scheduling request and HARQ acknowledgement.

Three forms of channel coding are used, one for the channel quality information (CQI), another for HARQ-ACK (acknowledgement) and scheduling request and another for combination of channel quality information (CQI) and HARQ-ACK.

110 ,...,, −Aaaa

110 ,...,, −Bbbb

Figure 5.2.3-1: Processing for UCI

5.2.3.1 Channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK

The HARQ acknowledgement bits are received from higher layers. Each positive acknowledgement (ACK) is encoded as a binary ‘0’ and each negative acknowledgement (NAK) is encoded as a binary ‘1’. The HARQ-ACK bits are processed according to [2].

5.2.3.2 Channel coding for UCI scheduling request

The scheduling request indication is received from higher layers and is processed according to [2].

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)26Release 8

5.2.3.3 Channel coding for UCI channel quality information

The channel quality bits input to the channel coding block are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa where A is the number of bits. The number of channel quality bits depends on the transmission format as indicated in subclause 5.2.3.3.1 for wideband reports and in subclause 5.2.3.3.2 for UE-selected subbands reports.

The channel quality indication is coded using a (20, A) code. The code words of the (20, A) code are a linear combination of the [14] basis sequences denoted Mi,n and defined in Table 5.2.3.3-1.

Table 5.2.3.3-1: Basis sequences for (20, A) code

i Mi,0 Mi,1 Mi,2 Mi,3 Mi,4 Mi,5 Mi,6 Mi,7 Mi,8 Mi,9 Mi,10 Mi,11 Mi,12 Mi,13

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 7 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 12 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 14 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 15 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 16 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 17 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 18 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 19 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

After encoding the bits are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb where 20=B and with

( )∑−

=

⋅=1

0, 2mod

A

nnini Mab where i = 0, 1, 2, …, B-1.

5.2.3.3.1 Channel quality information formats for wideband reports

Table 5.2.3.3.1-1 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the channel quality information feedback for wideband reports for PDSCH transmissions over a single antenna port or with open loop spatial multiplexing.

Table 5.2.3.3.1-1: UCI fields for channel quality information (CQI) feedback for wideband reports (single antenna port or open loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)

Field BitwidthWide-band CQI 4

Table 5.2.3.3.1-2 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the channel quality and precoding matrix information feedback for wideband reports for PDSCH transmissions with closed loop spatial multiplexing.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)27Release 8

Table 5.2.3.3.1-2: UCI fields for channel quality and precoding information (CQI/PMI) feedback for wideband reports (closed loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)

Bitwidths 2 antenna ports 4 antenna ports Field

Rank = 1 Rank = 2 Rank = 1 Rank > 1 Wide-band CQI 4 4 4 4

Spatial differential CQI 0 3 0 3 Precoding matrix indication 2 or 3 1 or 2 4 4

Table 5.2.3.3.1-3 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the rank indication feedback for wideband reports for PDSCH transmissions for open and closed loop spatial multiplexing.

Table 5.2.3.3.1-3: UCI fields for rank indication (RI) feedback for wideband reports

Bitwidths 4 antenna ports Field 2 antenna ports Max 2 layers Max 4 layers

Rank indication 1 1 2 The channel quality bits in Table 5.2.3.3.1-1 through Table 5.2.3.3.1-3 form the bit sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa with 0a corresponding to the first bit of the first field in each of the tables, 1a corresponding to the second bit of the first field in each of the tables, and 1−Aa corresponding to the last bit in the last field in each of the tables.

5.2.3.3.2 Channel quality information formats for UE-selected sub-band reports

Table 5.2.3.3.2-1 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the sub-band channel quality information feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions over a single antenna port or with open loop spatial multiplexing.

Table 5.2.3.3.2-1: UCI fields for channel quality information (CQI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports (single antenna port or open loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)

Field BitwidthSub-band label 1 or 2 Sub-band CQI 4

Table 5.2.3.3.2-2 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the sub-band channel quality information feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions with closed loop spatial multiplexing.

Table 5.2.3.3.2-2: UCI fields for channel quality information (CQI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports (closed loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)


Rank = 1 Rank = 2 Rank = 1 Rank > 1 Sub-band label 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 Sub-band CQI 4 4 4 4

Spatial differential CQI 0 3 0 3 Table 5.2.3.3.2-3 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the wide-band channel quality and precoding matrix information feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions with closed loop spatial multiplexing.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)28Release 8

Table 5.2.3.3.2-3: UCI fields for channel quality and precoding information (CQI/PMI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports (closed loop spatial multiplexing PDSCH transmission)


Rank = 1 Rank = 2 Rank = 1 Rank > 1 Wide-band CQI 4 4 4 4

Spatial differential CQI 0 3 0 3 Precoding matrix indication 2 or 3 1 or 2 4 4

Table 5.2.3.3.2-4 shows the fields and the corresponding bit widths for the rank indication feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports for PDSCH transmissions for open and closed loop spatial multiplexing.

Table 5.2.3.3.2-4: UCI fields for rank indication (RI) feedback for UE-selected sub-band reports

Bitwidths 4 antenna ports Field 2 antenna ports Max 2 layers Max 4 layers

Rank indication 1 1 2 The channel quality bits in Table 5.2.3.3.2-1 through Table 5.2.3.3.2-4 form the bit sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa with 0a corresponding to the first bit of the first field in each of the tables, 1a corresponding to the second bit of the first field in each of the tables, and 1−Aa corresponding to the last bit in the last field in each of the tables.

5.2.3.4 Channel coding for UCI channel quality information and HARQ-ACK

This section defines the channel coding scheme for the simultaneous transmission of channel quality information and HARQ-ACK information in a subframe.

When normal CP is used for uplink transmission, the channel quality information is coded according to subclause 5.2.3.3 with input bit sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −′′′′′′ Aaaaaa and output bit sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −′′′′′′ Bbbbbb , where 20=′B . The HARQ acknowledgement bits are denoted by 0a ′′ in case one HARQ acknowledgement bit or 10 ,aa ′′′′ in case two HARQ acknowledgement bits are reported per subframe. Each positive acknowledgement (ACK) is encoded as a binary ‘0’ and each negative acknowledgement (NAK) is encoded as a binary ‘1’.

The output of this channel coding block for normal CP is denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb , where

1,...,0 , −′=′= Bibb ii

In case one HARQ acknowledgement bit is reported per subframe:

0abB ′′=′ and ( )1+′= BB

In case two HARQ acknowledgement bits are reported per subframe:

110 , abab BB ′′=′′= +′′ and ( )2+′= BB

When extended CP is used for uplink transmission, the channel quality information and the HARQ-ACK acknowledgement bits are jointly coded. The HARQ acknowledgement bits are denoted by 0a ′′ in case one HARQ acknowledgement bit or [ ]10 , aa ′′′′ in case two HARQ acknowledgement bits are reported per subframe.

In case one HARQ acknowledgment bit is reported in the subframe, we define 00 aa ′′=′′′ and 1=blockACKK .

In case two HARQ acknowledgment bits are reported in the subframe, we define [ ] ( )[ ]1010210 ,,,, aaaaaaa ′′⊕′′′′′′=′′′′′′′′′ and

3=blockACKK .

The bit sequence 110 ,...,, −ACKAaaa is obtained as follows:

Set i to 0.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)29Release 8

while ACKAi <

blockACKKii aa

mod′′′=

end while

The coded bit sequence 110 ,...,, −ACKAaaa is multiplexed with the channel quality information denoted by

13210 ,...,,,, −′′′′′′ Aaaaaa to yield the sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa where 1,...,0 , −′=′=+ Aiaa iiAACK

and ( )AAA ACK ′+= .

The sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa is encoded according to section 5.2.3.3 to yield the output bit sequence

13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb where 20=B .

5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information

5.3.1 Broadcast channel Figure 5.3.1-1 shows the processing structure for the BCH transport channel. Data arrives to the coding unit in form of a maximum of one transport block every transmission time interval (TTI) of 40ms. The following coding steps can be identified:


− Channel coding

− Rate matching

The coding steps for BCH transport channel are shown in the figure below.

110 ,...,, −Aaaa

110 ,...,, −Kccc

110 ,...,, −Eeee

)(1

)(1

)(0 ,...,, i

Dii

rddd −

Figure 5.3.1-1: Transport channel processing for BCH


Error detection is provided on BCH transport blocks through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)30Release 8


The parity bits are computed and attached to the BCH transport block according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to 16 bits. After the attachment, the CRC bits are scrambled according to the eNode-B transmit antenna configuration with the sequence 15,1,0, ,...,, antantant xxx as indicated in Table 5.3.1.1-1 to form the sequence of bits 13210 ,...,,,, −Kccccc where

kk ac = for k = 0, 1, 2, …, A-1

( ) 2mod, AkantAkk xpc −− += for k = A, A+1, A+2,..., A+15.

Table 5.3.1.1-1: CRC mask for PBCH

Number of transmit antenna ports at eNode-B PBCH CRC mask >< 15,1,0, ,...,, antantant xxx

1 <0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0> 2 <1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1> 4 <0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 1>

5.3.1.2 Channel coding

Information bits are delivered to the channel coding block. They are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Kccccc , where K is the number of bits, and they are tail biting convolutionally encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.1.

After encoding the bits are denoted by )(1

)(3

)(2

)(1

)(0 ,...,,,, i

Diiii ddddd − , with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where D is the number of bits

on the i-th coded stream, i.e., KD = .


A tail biting convolutionally coded block is delivered to the rate matching block. This block of coded bits is denoted by )(

1)(

3)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,,, iD

iiii ddddd − , with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where i is the coded stream index and D is the number of bits in each coded stream. This coded block is rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.2.

After rate matching, the bits are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Eeeeee , where E is the number of rate matched bits.

5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel Figure 5.3.2-1 shows the processing structure for the DL-SCH, PCH and MCH transport channels. Data arrives to the coding unit in form of a maximum of one transport block every transmission time interval (TTI). The following coding steps can be identified:


− Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment

− Channel coding

− Rate matching

− Code block concatenation

The coding steps for DL-SCH, PCH and MCH transport channels are shown in the figure below.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)31Release 8

Channel coding

Rate matching

Code block concatenation

110 ,...,, −Aaaa

110 ,...,, −Bbbb

( )110 ,...,, −rKrrr ccc

( ))(

1)(

1)(

0 ,...,, iDr

ir

ir r

ddd −

( )110 ,...,, −rErrr eee

110 ,...,, −Gfff

Transport block CRC attachment

Code block segmentationCode block CRC attachment

Figure 5.3.2-1: Transport channel processing for DL-SCH, PCH and MCH


Error detection is provided on transport blocks through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).


The parity bits are computed and attached to the transport block according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to 24 bits and using the generator polynomial gCRC24A(D).

5.3.2.2 Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment

The bits input to the code block segmentation are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb where B is the number of bits in the transport block (including CRC).

Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment are performed according to subclause 5.1.2.

The bits after code block segmentation are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rKrrrrr ccccc , where r is the code block number and Kr is the number of bits for code block number r.


Code blocks are delivered to the channel coding block. They are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rKrrrrr ccccc , where r is the code block number, and Kr is the number of bits in code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each code block is individually turbo encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.2.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)32Release 8

After encoding the bits are denoted by ( ))(

1)(

3)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,,, iDr

ir

ir

ir

ir r

ddddd − , with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where rD is the number of

bits on the i-th coded stream for code block number r, i.e. 4+= rr KD .


Turbo coded blocks are delivered to the rate matching block. They are denoted by ( ))(

1)(

3)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,,, iDr

ir

ir

ir

ir r

ddddd − ,

with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where r is the code block number, i is the coded stream index, and rD is the number of bits in each coded stream of code block number r. The total number of code blocks is denoted by C and each coded block is individually rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.1.

After rate matching, the bits are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rErrrrr eeeee , where r is the coded block number, and where

rE is the number of rate matched bits for code block number r.

5.3.2.5 Code block concatenation

The bits input to the code block concatenation block are denoted by ( )13210 ,...,,,, −rErrrrr eeeee for 1,...,0 −= Cr and

where rE is the number of rate matched bits for the r-th code block.

Code block concatenation is performed according to subclause 5.1.5.2.

The bits after code block concatenation are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Gfffff , where G is the total number of coded bits for transmission.

5.3.3 Downlink control information A DCI transports downlink or uplink scheduling information, or uplink power control commands for one MAC ID. The MAC ID is implicitly encoded in the CRC.

Figure 5.3.3-1 shows the processing structure for the DCI. The following coding steps can be identified:

− Information element multiplexing

− CRC attachment

− Channel coding

− Rate matching

The coding steps for DCI are shown in the figure below.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)33Release 8

CRC attachment

Channel coding

Rate matching

110 ,...,, −Aaaa

110 ,...,, −Kccc

)(1

)(1

)(0 ,...,, i

Dii ddd −

110 ,...,, −Eeee

Figure 5.3.3-1: Processing for DCI

5.3.3.1 DCI formats

5.3.3.1.1 Format 0

DCI format 0 is used for the transmission of UL-SCH assignments.

The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 0:

- Flag for format0/format1A differentiation – 1 bit

- Hopping flag – 1 bit

- Resource block assignment and hopping resource allocation – ⎡ ⎤)2/)1((log ULRB

ULRB2 +NN bits

- For PUSCH hopping:

- NUL_hop bits are used to obtain the value of )(~ inPRB as indicated in subclause [8.4] of [3]

- ⎡ ⎤ ⎟⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ −+ hopULNNN _

DLRB

DLRB2 )2/)1((log bits provide the resource allocation of the first slot in the UL

subframe

- For non-hopping PUSCH:

- ⎡ ⎤ ⎟⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ + )2/)1((log DL

RBDLRB2 NN bits provide the resource allocation of the first slot in the UL subframe

- Modulation and coding scheme and redundancy version – 5 bits

- New data indicator – 1 bit

- TPC command for scheduled PUSCH – 2 bits

- [Cyclic shift for DM RS – 3 bits]

- UL index (this field just applies to TDD operation)

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)34Release 8

- CQI request – 1 bit

5.3.3.1.2 Format 1

DCI format 1 is used for the transmission of DL-SCH assignments for SIMO operation.


-

- Resource allocation header (resource allocation type 0 / type 1) – 1 bit

- Resource block assignment:

- For resource allocation type 0 [3],

- ⎡ ⎤PN /DLRB bits provide the resource allocation


- ( )⎡ ⎤P2log bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset

- 1 bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span

- ⎡ ⎤ ( )⎡ ⎤( )1log/ 2DLRB −− PPN bits provide the resource allocation

where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in subclause [7.1.1] of [3]

- Modulation and coding scheme – 5 bits

- HARQ process number – 3 bits (FDD) , 4 bits (TDD)


- Redundancy version – 2 bits

- TPC command for PUCCH – 2 bits

5.3.3.1.3 Format 1A

DCI format 1A is used for a compact transmission of DL-SCH assignments for SIMO operation.

The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 1A:

- Flag for format0/format1A differentiation – 1 bit

- Distributed transmission flag – 1 bit

- Resource block assignment

- Modulation and coding scheme – 5bits

- HARQ process number – 3 bits (FDD) , 4 bits (TDD)




3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)35Release 8

5.3.3.1.4 Format 2

DCI format 2 is used for the transmission of DL-SCH assignments for MIMO operation.


In general:

- Resource allocation header (resource allocation type 0 / type 1) – 1 bit

- Resource block assignment:


- ⎡ ⎤PN /DLRB bits provide the resource allocation


- ( )⎡ ⎤P2log bits of this field are used as a header specific to this resource allocation type to indicate the selected resource blocks subset

- 1 bit indicates a shift of the resource allocation span

- ⎡ ⎤ ( )⎡ ⎤( )1log/ 2DLRB −− PPN bits provide the resource allocation

where the value of P depends on the number of DL resource blocks as indicated in subclause [7.1.1] of [3]


- Number of layers – 2 bits

- HARQ process number - 3 bits (FDD), 4 bits (TDD)

- HARQ swap flag – 1 bit

- Precoding information –

- Precoding confirmation – 1 bit

For the first codeword:

- Modulation and coding scheme – 5 bits



For the second codeword:

- Modulation and coding scheme – [5]3 bits



5.3.3.1.5 Format 3

DCI format 3 is used for the transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH with 2-bit power adjustments.


- TPC command for user 1, user 2,…, user N

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)36Release 8

5.3.3.1.6 Format 3A

DCI format 3A is used for the transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH with single bit power adjustments.

The following information is transmitted by means of the DCI format 3A:

- TPC command for user 1, user 2,…, user 2N

5.3.3.2 CRC attachment

Error detection is provided on DCI transmissions through a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).

The entire PDCCH payload is used to calculate the CRC parity bits. Denote the bits of the PDCCH payload by 13210 ,...,,,, −Aaaaaa , and the parity bits by 13210 ,...,,,, −Lppppp . A is the PDCCH payload size and L is the number of parity bits.

The parity bits are computed and attached according to subclause 5.1.1 setting L to [16] bits, resulting in the sequence 13210 ,...,,,, −Bbbbbb , where B = A+ L. After the attachment, the CRC bits are scrambled with the UE identity

15,1,0, ,...,, ueueue xxx to form the sequence of bits 13210 ,...,,,, −Bccccc . The relation between ck and bk is:

kk bc = for k = 0, 1, 2, …, A-1

( ) 2mod, Akuekk xbc −+= for k = A, A+1, A+2,..., A+15.


Information bits are delivered to the channel coding block. They are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Kccccc , where K is the number of bits, and they are tail biting convolutionally encoded according to subclause 5.1.3.1.

After encoding the bits are denoted by )(1

)(3

)(2

)(1

)(0 ,...,,,, i

Diiii ddddd − , with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where D is the number of

bits on the i-th coded stream, i.e., KD = .


A tail biting convolutionally coded block is delivered to the rate matching block. This block of coded bits is denoted by )(

1)(

3)(

2)(

1)(

0 ,...,,,, iD

iiii ddddd − , with 2 and ,1,0=i , and where i is the coded stream index and D is the number of bits in each coded stream. This coded block is rate matched according to subclause 5.1.4.2.

After rate matching, the bits are denoted by 13210 ,...,,,, −Eeeeee , where E is the number of rate matched bits.

5.3.4 Control format indicator Data arrives each subframe to the coding unit in the form of an indicator for the time span, in units of OFDM symbols, of the DCI in that subframe, i.e., CFI = 1, 2 or 3.

The coding flow is shown in Figure 5.3.4-1.

3110 ,...,, bbb

Channel coding

CFI

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)37Release 8

Figure 5.3.4-1 Coding for CFI


The control format indicator is coded according to Table 5.3.4-1.

Table 5.3.4-1: CFI codewords

5.3.5 HARQ indicator Data arrives to the coding unit in form of

indicators for HARQ acknowledgement.

The coding flow is shown in Figure 5.3.5-1.

210 ,, bbb

Channel coding

HI

Figure 5.3.5-1 Coding for HI


The HARQ indicator is coded according to Table 5.3.5-1, where for a positive acknowledgement HI = 0 and for a negative acknowledgement HI = 1.

Table 5.3.5-1: HI codewords

CFI CFI codeword

< b0, b1, …, b31 >

1 <0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1>

2 <1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0>

3 <1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1,0,1,1>

4 (Reserved) <0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0>

HI HI codeword < b0, b1, b2 >

0 < 0,0,0 >

1 < 1,1,1 >

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.212 V8.2.0 (2008-03)38Release 8

Annex <X> (informative): Change history

Change history Date TSG # TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Old New 2006-09 Skeleton 0.0.02006-10 Updated skeleton 0.0.0 0.0.12006-10 Endorsed skeleton 0.0.1 0.1.02006-11 Added TC. Added Broadcast, Paging and MBMS transport

channels in Table 4.2-1. 0.1.0 0.1.1

2006-11 Endorsed v 0.2.0 0.1.1 0.2.02006-12 Added CC. Added type of coding for each transport channel or

control information. 0.2.0 0.2.1

2007-01 Editor’s version 0.2.1 0.2.22007-01 Endorsed v 0.3.0 0.2.2 0.3.02007-02 Added QPP turbo Interleaver description. 0.3.0 0.3.12007-02 Editor’s version 0.3.1 0.3.22007-02 Endorsed v 0.4.0 0.3.2 0.4.02007-02 Added CRC details for PDSCH, PDCCH and PUSCH. Added QPP

turbo-interleaver parameters. Set Z to 6144. Added details on code block segmentation.

0.4.0 0.4.1

2007-02 Editor’s version 0.4.1 0.4.22007-03 RAN#35 RP-070170 For information at RAN#35 0.4.2 1.0.02007-03 Editor’s version 1.0.0 1.0.12007-03 Editor’s version 1.0.1 1.1.02007-05 Editor’s version 1.1.0 1.1.12007-05 Editor’s version 1.1.1 1.1.22007-05 Editor’s version 1.1.2 1.2.02007-06 Added circular buffer rate matching for PDSCH and PUSCH.

Miscellaneous changes. 1.2.0 1.2.1

2007-06 Editor’s version 1.2.1 1.2.22007-07 Editor’s version 1.2.2 1.2.32007-07 Endorsed by email following decision taken at RAN1#49b 1.2.3 1.3.02007-08 Editor’s version including decision from RAN1#49bis. 1.3.0 1.3.12007-08 Editor’s version 1.3.1 1.3.22007-08 Editor’s version 1.3.2 1.4.02007-09 Editor’s version with decisions from RAN1#50 1,4.0 1,4,12007-09 Editor’s version 1.4.1 1.4.210/09/07 RAN#37 RP-070730 - - For approval at RAN#37 1.4.2 2.0.012/09/07 RAN_37 RP-070730 - - Approved version 2.0.0 8.0.028/11/07 RAN_38 RP-070949 0001 - Update of 36.212 8.0.0 8.1.005/03/08 RAN_39 RP-080145 0002 - Update to 36.212 incorporating decisions from RAN1#51bis and

RAN1#52 8.1.0 8.2.0



Physical layer procedures(Release 8)

The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organisational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organisational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification.Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organisational Partners’ Publications Offices.

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)2Release 8T


3GPP

Postal address


Valbonne – France Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16






3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)3Release 8T

Contents Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................5 1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................6 2 References ................................................................................................................................................6 3 Definitions, symbols, and abbreviations ..................................................................................................6 3.1 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 6 3.2 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 6 4 Synchronisation procedures .....................................................................................................................7 4.1 Cell search ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 4.2 Timing synchronisation ..................................................................................................................................... 7 4.2.1 Synchronisation primitives........................................................................................................................... 7 4.2.2 Radio link monitoring .................................................................................................................................. 7 4.2.3 Inter-cell synchronisation............................................................................................................................. 7 4.2.4 Transmission timing adjustments................................................................................................................. 7 5 Power control ...........................................................................................................................................8 5.1 Uplink power control ......................................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.1 Physical uplink shared channel .................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.1.1 UE behaviour.......................................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.2 Physical uplink control channel ................................................................................................................... 9 5.1.2.1 UE behaviour.......................................................................................................................................... 9 5.1.3 Sounding Reference Symbol ...................................................................................................................... 10 5.1.3.1 UE behaviour........................................................................................................................................ 10 5.2 Downlink power allocation.............................................................................................................................. 11 5.2.1 UE behaviour ............................................................................................................................................. 11 5.2.2 eNodeB behaviour...................................................................................................................................... 11 5.2.3 Downlink channel subcarrier transmit power offset................................................................................... 11 6 Random access procedure ......................................................................................................................11 6.1 Physical non-synchronized random access procedure ..................................................................................... 12 6.1.1 Timing........................................................................................................................................................ 12 6.1.1.1 Synchronized ........................................................................................................................................ 12 6.1.1.2 Unsynchronized.................................................................................................................................... 12 6.1.2 Preamble Sequence selection ..................................................................................................................... 12 7 Physical downlink shared channel related procedures ...........................................................................12 7.1 UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel................................................................. 12 7.1.1 Single-antenna port .................................................................................................................................... 12 7.1.2 Transmit diversity..................................................................................................................................... 13 7.1.3 Open-loop spatial multiplexing ................................................................................................................ 13 7.1.4 Closed-loop spatial multiplexing.............................................................................................................. 13 7.1.5 Void .......................................................................................................................................................... 13 7.1.6 Resource allocation................................................................................................................................... 13 7.1.6.1 Resource allocation type 0.................................................................................................................... 13 7.1.6.2 Resource allocation type 1.................................................................................................................... 14 7.1.6.3 Resource allocation type 2.................................................................................................................... 14 7.2 UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI) and rank

indication (RI).................................................................................................................................................. 15 7.2.1 Aperiodic/Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUSCH ........................................................................ 16 7.2.2 Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUCCH......................................................................................... 20 7.2.3 Channel quality indicator (CQI) definition ................................................................................................ 23 7.2.4 Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) definition ............................................................................................. 25 8 Physical uplink shared channel related procedures ................................................................................25 8.1 Resource Allocation for PDCCH DCI Format 0.............................................................................................. 25 8.2 UE sounding procedure ................................................................................................................................... 25 8.2.1 Sounding definition.................................................................................................................................... 26

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)4Release 8T

8.3 UE ACK/NACK procedure ............................................................................................................................. 26 8.4 UE PUSCH Hopping procedure ...................................................................................................................... 26 8.4.1 Type 1 PUSCH Hopping............................................................................................................................ 27 8.4.2 Type 2 PUSCH Hopping............................................................................................................................ 27 8.5 UE Reference Symbol procedure..................................................................................................................... 28 9 Physical downlink control channel procedures ......................................................................................28 9.1 UE procedure for determining physical downlink control channel assignment............................................... 28 9.1.1 PDCCH Assignment Procedure ................................................................................................................. 28 9.1.2 PHICH Assignment Procedure................................................................................................................... 28 10 Physical uplink control channel procedures...........................................................................................29 10.1 UE procedure for determining physical uplink control channel assignment ................................................... 29 10.2 Uplink ACK/NACK timing ............................................................................................................................. 29


3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)5Release 8T

Foreword This Technical Specification (TS) has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).

The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of this present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows:

Version x.y.z

where:

x the first digit:






3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)6Release 8T

1 Scope The present document specifies and establishes the characteristics of the physicals layer procedures in the FDD and TDD modes of E-UTRA.





[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: “Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications”

[2] 3GPP TS 36.201: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer – General Description”

[3] 3GPP TS 36.211: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation”

[4] 3GPP TS 36.212: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding”

[5] 3GPP TS 36.214: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer – Measurements”

3 Definitions, symbols, and abbreviations


DLRBN Downlink bandwidth configuration, expressed in units of as defined in [3] RB

scNULRBN Uplink bandwidth configuration, expressed in units of as defined in [3] RB

scN

sT Basic time unit as defined in [3]

3.2 Abbreviations For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply.

ACK Acknowledgement BCH Broadcast Channel CCE Control Channel Element CQI Channel Quality Indicator CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)7Release 8T

DL Downlink DTX Discontinuous Transmission EPRE Energy Per Resource Element MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme NACK Negative Acknowledgement PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel PCFICH Physical Control Format Indicator Channel PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel PHICH Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel PRACH Physical Random Access Channel PRB Physical Resource Block PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel QoS Quality of Service RBG Resource Block Group RE Resource Element RPF Repetition Factor RS Reference Signal SIR Signal-to-Interference Ratio SINR Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio SRS Sounding Reference Symbol TA Time alignment TTI Transmission Time Interval UE User Equipment UL Uplink UL-SCH Uplink Shared Channel VRB Virtual Resource Block

4 Synchronisation procedures

4.1 Cell search Cell search is the procedure by which a UE acquires time and frequency synchronization with a cell and detects the physical layer Cell ID of that cell. E-UTRA cell search supports a scalable overall transmission bandwidth corresponding to 6 resource blocks and upwards.

The following signals are transmitted in the downlink to facilitate cell search: the primary and secondary synchronization signals.

4.2 Timing synchronisation

4.2.1 Synchronisation primitives

4.2.2 Radio link monitoring

4.2.3 Inter-cell synchronisation [For example, for cell sites with a multicast physical channel]

4.2.4 Transmission timing adjustments Upon reception of a timing advance command, the UE shall adjust its uplink transmission timing. The timing advance command is expressed in multiples of 16 and is relative to the current uplink timing. sT

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)8Release 8T

For a timing advance command received on subframe n, then corresponding adjustment occurs at the beginning of subframe n+x.

Editor’s note: RAN1 needs to agree on x.

5 Power control Downlink power control determines the energy per resource element (EPRE). The term resource element energy denotes the energy prior to CP insertion. The term resource element energy also denotes the average energy taken over all constellation points for the modulation scheme applied. Uplink power control determines the average power over a DFT-SOFDM symbol in which the physical channel is transmitted.

5.1 Uplink power control Uplink power control controls the transmit power of the different uplink physical channels.

A cell wide overload indicator (OI) is exchanged over X2 for inter-cell power control. An indication X also exchanged over X2 indicates PRBs that an eNodeB scheduler allocates to cell edge UEs and that will be most sensitive to inter-cell interference.

[Note: Above lines regarding OI, X and X2 to be moved to an appropriate RAN3 spec when it becomes available]

5.1.1 Physical uplink shared channel

5.1.1.1 UE behaviour

The setting of the UE Transmit power for the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) transmission in subframe i is defined by

PUSCHP

)}())(()())((log10,min{)( TFO_PUSCHPUSCH10MAXPUSCH ifiTFPLjPiMPiP +Δ+⋅++= α [dBm]

where,

• is the maximum allowed power that depends on the UE power class MAXP

• is the size of the PUSCH resource assignment expressed in number of resource blocks valid for subframe i.

)(PUSCH iM

• is a parameter composed of the sum of a 8-bit cell specific nominal component signalled from higher layers for j=0 and 1 in the range of [-126,24] dBm with 1dB

resolution and a 4-bit UE specific component configured by RRC for j=0 and 1 in the range of [-8, 7] dB with 1dB resolution. For PUSCH (re)transmissions corresponding to a configured scheduling grant then j=0 and for PUSCH (re)transmissions corresponding to a received PDCCH with DCI format 0 associated with a new packet transmission then j=1.

)(O_PUSCH jP)( PUSCHO_NOMINAL_ jP

)(O_UE_PUSCH jP

• { 1,9.0,8.0,7.0,6.0,5.0,4.0,0∈ }α is a 3-bit cell specific parameter provided by higher layers

• PL is the downlink pathloss estimate calculated in the UE

• for )12(log10))(( 10TF −=Δ ⋅ SKMPRiTF 25.1=SK and 0 for 0=SK where is a cell specific parameter given by RRC

SK

o is the PUSCH transport format valid for subframe i )(iTF

o MPR = modulation x coding rate = where are the number of information bits and is the number of resource elements determined from and for subframe i

REINFO / NN INFON

REN )(iTF )(PUSCH iM

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)9Release 8T

• PUSCHδ is a UE specific correction value, also referred to as a TPC command and is included in PDCCH with DCI format 0 or jointly coded with other TPC commands in PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A. The current PUSCH power control adjustment state is given by which is defined by: )(if

o )()1()( PUSCHPUSCH Kiifif −+−= δ if )(∗f represents accumulation

where and = 4 0)0( =f PUSCHK

The UE attempts to decode a PDCCH of DCI format 0 and a PDCCH of DCI format 3/3A in every subframe except when in DRX

0PUSCH =δ dB for a subframe where no TPC command is decoded or where DRX occurs.

The PUSCHδ dB accumulated values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 0 are [-1, 0, 1, 3].

The PUSCHδ dB accumulated values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A are one of [-1, 1] or [-1, 0, 1, 3] as semi-statically configured by higher layers.

If UE has reached maximum power, positive TPC commands are not accumulated

If UE has reached minimum power, negative TPC commands shall not be accumulated

UE shall reset accumulation

• at cell-change

• when entering/leaving RRC active state

• when an absolute TPC command is received

• when is received )(O_UE_PUSCH jP

• when the UE (re)synchronizes

o )()( PUSCHPUSCH Kiif −= δ if )(∗f represents current absolute value

where )(PUSCH PUSCHKi −δ was signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 0 on subframe PUSCHKi −

where 4=PUSCHK

The PUSCHδ dB absolute values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 0 are [-4,-1, 1, 4].

for a subframe where no PDCCH with DCI format 0 is decoded or where DRX occurs.

)1()( −= ifif

o type (accumulation or current absolute) is a UE specific parameter that is given by RRC. )(∗f

5.1.2 Physical uplink control channel


The setting of the UE Transmit power for the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission in subframe i is defined by

PUCCHP

)}()(,min{)( TF_PUCCHO_PUCCHMAXPUCCH igTFPLPPiP +Δ++= [dBm]

where

• table entries for each PUCCH transport format (TF ) defined in Table 5.4-1 in [3] are given by RRC

)(TF_PUCCH TFΔ

o Each signalled 2-bit value corresponds to a TF relative to PUCCH DCI format 0. )(TF_PUCCH TFΔ

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)10Release 8T

• is a parameter composed of the sum of a 5-bit cell specific parameter provided by higher layers with 1 dB resolution in the range of [-127, -96] dBm and a UE specific component

configured by RRC in the range of [-8, 7] dB with 1 dB resolution.

O_PUCCHP PUCCH O_NOMINAL_P

O_UE_PUCCHP

• PUCCHδ is a UE specific correction value, also referred to as a TPC command, included in a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 or sent jointly coded with other UE specific PUCCH correction values on a PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A.

o The UE attempts to decode a PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A and a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 on every subframe except when in DRX.

o PUCCHδ from a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 overrides that from a PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A when both are decoded in a given subframe.

o PUCCHδ =0 dB for a subframe where no PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2/3/3A is decoded or where DRX occurs.

o where is the current PUCCH power control adjustment state with initial condition

)()1()( PUCCHPUCCH Kiigig −Δ+−= )(ig0)0( =g .

The PUCCHδ dB values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 are [-1, 0, 1, 3].

The PUCCHδ dB values signalled on PDCCH with DCI format 3/3A are [-1,1] or [-1,0,1,3] as semi-statically configured by higher layers.

If UE has reached maximum power, positive TPC commands are not accumulated

If UE has reached minimum power, negative TPC commands shall not be accumulated

UE shall reset accumulation

• at cell-change

• when entering/leaving RRC active state

• when is received )(O_UE_PUCCH jP

• when the UE (re)synchronizes

5.1.3 Sounding Reference Symbol


The setting of the UE Transmit power for the Sounding Reference Symbol transmitted on subframe i is defined by SRSP

)}()()(log10,min{)( O_PUSCHSRS10SRS_OFFSETMAXSRS ifPLjPMPPiP +⋅+++= α [dBm]

where

• is a 4-bit UE specific parameter semi-statically configured by higher layers with 1dB step size in the range [-3, 12] dB.

SRS_OFFSETP

• is the bandwidth of the SRS transmission in subframe i expressed in number of resource blocks. SRSM

• is the current power control adjustment state for the PUSCH, see Section 5.1.1.1. )(if

• is a parameter as defined in Section 5.1.1.1. )(O_PUSCH jP

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)11Release 8T

5.2 Downlink power allocation The eNodeB determines the downlink transmit energy per resource element.

A UE may assume downlink reference symbol EPRE is constant across the downlink system bandwidth and constant across all subframes until different RS power information is received.

For each UE, the PDSCH-to-RS EPRE ratio among REs in all the OFDM symbols containing RS is equal and is denoted by Aρ .

The UE may assume that for 64 QAM or RI>1 spatial multiplexing Aρ is equal to which is a UE specific semi-static parameter signalled by higher layers.

AP

For each UE, the PDSCH-to-RS EPRE ratio among REs in all the OFDM symbols not containing RS is equal and is denoted by Bρ .

The cell-specific ratio AB ρρ / is given by Table 5.2-1 according to cell-specific parameter signalled by higher layers and the number of configured eNodeB cell specific antenna ports.

BP

Table 5.2-1: Ratio of PDSCH-to-RS EPRE in symbols with and without reference symbols for 1, 2, or 4 cell specific antenna ports

AB ρρ / BP

One Antenna Port Two Antenna Ports Four Antenna Ports 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

For PMCH with 16QAM or 64QAM, the UE may assume that the PMCH-to-RS EPRE ratio is equal to 0 dB.

5.2.1 UE behaviour

5.2.2 eNodeB behaviour

5.2.3 Downlink channel subcarrier transmit power offset [Definition of and restrictions on the subcarrier transmit power offset for each downlink channel type]

6 Random access procedure Prior to initiation of the non-synchronized physical random access procedure, Layer 1 shall receive the following information from the higher layers:

1. Random access channel parameters (PRACH configuration, frequency position and preamble format)

2. Parameters for determining the root sequences and their cyclic shifts in the preamble sequence set for the cell (index to root sequence table, cyclic shift ( ), and set type (normal or high-speed set)) CSN

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)12Release 8T

6.1 Physical non-synchronized random access procedure From the physical layer perspective, the L1 random access procedure encompasses the transmission of random access preamble and random access response. The remaining messages are scheduled for transmission by the higher layer on the shared data channel and are not considered part of the L1 random access procedure. A random access channel occupies 6 resource blocks in a subframe or set of consecutive subframes reserved for random access preamble transmissions. The eNodeB is not prohibited from scheduling data in the resource blocks reserved for random access channel preamble transmission.

The following steps are required for the L1 random access procedure:

1. Layer 1 procedure is triggered upon request of a preamble transmission by higher layers.

2. A preamble index, preamble transmission power (PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_POWER), associated RA-RNTI, and PRACH resource are indicated by higher layers as part of the request.

3. A preamble sequence is then selected from the preamble sequence set using the preamble index.

4. A single preamble transmission then occurs using the selected preamble sequence with transmission power PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_POWER on the indicated PRACH resource.

5. If no associated PDCCH with RA-RNTI is detected within the random access response window then the corresponding DL-SCH transport block is passed to higher layers.

6. If the random access response window has past then the physical random access procedure is exited.

6.1.1 Timing

6.1.1.1 Synchronized

6.1.1.2 Unsynchronized

6.1.2 Preamble Sequence selection

7 Physical downlink shared channel related procedures

7.1 UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel

The UE is semi-statically configured via higher layer signalling to receive the physical downlink shared channel based on one of the following transmission modes:

1. Single-antenna port 2. Transmit diversity 3. Open-loop spatial multiplexing 4. Closed-loop spatial multiplexing 5. Multi-user MIMO

7.1.1 Single-antenna port In the single-antenna port mode, the UE may assume that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to Section 6.3.4.1 of [3]

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)13Release 8T

7.1.2 Transmit diversity In the transmit diversity mode, the UE may assume that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to Section 6.3.4.3 of [3]

7.1.3 Open-loop spatial multiplexing In the open-loop spatial multiplexing transmission mode, the UE may assume, based on the rank indication (RI) obtained from the associated DCI as determined from the number of assigned transmission layers, that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to the following:

RI = 1 : transmit diversity as defined in Section 6.3.4.3 of [3] RI > 1 : large delay CDD as defined in Section 6.3.4.2.2 of [3]

For RI>1, the operation of large delay CDD is further defined as follows:

For 2 antenna ports, the precoder for data resource element index i, denoted by W(i) is selected according to where denotes the precoding matrix corresponding to precoder index 1 in Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 of

[3]. 1)( CiW = 1C

For 4 anetnna ports, the UE may assume that the eNB cyclically assigns different precoders to different data resource elements on the physical downlink shared channel as follows. A different precoder is used every υ data resource elements, where υ denotes the number of transmission layers in the case of spatial multiplexing. In particular, the precoder for data resource element index i, denoted by W(i) is selected

according to kCiW =)( , where k is the precoder index given by 14,1mod +⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛−⎥⎥

⎤⎢⎢⎡=υik , where k=1,2,…4,

and denote precoder matrices corresponding to precoder indices 12,13,14 and 15, respectively, in Table 6.3.4.2.3-2 of [3]. .

4321 ,,, CCCC

7.1.4 Closed-loop spatial multiplexing In the closed-loop spatial multiplexing transmission mode, the UE may assume that the eNB transmits on the physical downlink shared channel according to zero/small delay CDD for all the applicable number of transmission layers as defined in Section 6.3.4.2.1 of [3].

7.1.5 Void

7.1.6 Resource allocation The UE shall interpret the resource allocation field depending on the PDCCH DCI format detected. A resource allocation field in each PDCCH includes two parts, a type field and information consisting of the actual resource allocation. PDCCH with type 0 and type 1 resource allocation have the same format and are distinguished from each other via the single bit type field. For system bandwidth less than or equal to 10 PRBs the resource allocation field in each PDCCH contains only information of the actual resource allocation. PDCCH with DCI format 0 and 1A have a type 2 resource allocation which is a different format from PDCCH with a type 0 or type 1 resource allocation. PDCCH with a type 2 resource allocation do not have a type field.

7.1.6.1 Resource allocation type 0

In resource allocations of type 0, a bitmap indicates the resource block groups (RBGs) that are allocated to the scheduled UE where a RBG is a set of consecutive physical resource blocks (PRBs). Resource block group size (P) is a function of the system bandwidth as shown in Table 7.1.6.1-1. The total number of RBGs ( ) for downlink

system bandwidth of PRBs is given by

RBGNDLRBN ⎡ ⎤PNN RBG /DL

RB= where ⎣ ⎦PN /DLRB of the RBGs are of size P and if

then one of the RBGs is of size⎡ ⎤ ⎣ ⎦ 0// DLRB

DLRB >− PNPN ⎣ ⎦PNPN /DL

RBDLRB ⋅− . The bitmap is of size bits

with one bitmap bit per RBG such that each RBG is addressable. RBGN

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)14Release 8T

Table 7.1.6.1-1: Type 0 Resource Allocation RBG Size vs. Downlink System Bandwidth

System Bandwidth RBG SizeDLRBN (P)

≤10 1 11 -– 26 2

27 -– 6463 3 64 -– 110 4


In resource allocations of type 1, a bitmap of size ⎡ ⎤PN /DLRB indicates to a scheduled UE the PRBs from the set of

PRBs from one of P resource block group subsets. Also P is the resource block group size associated with the system bandwidth as shown in Table 7.1.6.1-1. The portion of the bitmap used to address PRBs in a selected RBG subset has size and is defined as TYPE1

RBN

⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ 1)(log/ 2DLRB

TYPE1RB −−= PPNN

where is the overall bitmap size and is the minimum number of bits needed to select one of the P RBG subsets and one additional bit is used to indicate whether the addressable PRBs of a selected RBG subset is left justified or is right justified (right shifted) where the shift is needed for full resource block granular addressability of all PRBs in a carrier since the number of PRBs in a RBG subset is larger than the PRB addressing portion of the bitmap as

indicated by . Each bit in the PRB addressing portion of the bitmap addresses a single addressable PRB in the selected RBG subset starting at the left most addressable PRB.

⎡ PN /DLRB ⎤ ⎤

⎤

⎦

⎡ )(log2 P

⎡ PNN /DLRB

TYPE1RB <


In resource allocations of type 2, the resource allocation information indicates to a scheduled UE a set of contiguously allocated physical or virtual resource blocks depending on the setting of a 1-bit flag carried on the associated PDCCH. PRB allocations vary from a single PRB up to a maximum number of PRBs spanning the system bandwidth. For VRB allocations .the resource allocation information consists of a starting VRB number and a number of consecutive VRBs where each VRB is mapped to multiple non-consecutive PRBs.

A type 2 resource allocation field consists of a resource indication value (RIV) corresponding to a starting resource block ( ) and a length in terms of contiguously allocated resource blocks ( ). The resource indication value is defined by

startRB CRBsL

if then ⎣ 2/)1( DLRBCRBs NL ≤−

startCRBsDLRB RBLNRIV +−= )1(

else

)1()1( startDLRBCRBs

DLRB

DLRB RBNLNNRIV −−++−=

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)15Release 8T

7.2 UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI) and rank indication (RI) The time and frequency resources that can be used by the UE to report CQI, PMI, and RI are controlled by the eNB. For spatial multiplexing, as given in [3], the UE shall determine a RI corresponding to the number of useful transmission layers. For transmit diversity as given in [3], RI is equal to one.

CQI, PMI, and RI reporting is periodic or aperiodic. A UE transmits CQI, PMI, and RI reporting on a PUCCH for subframes with no PUSCH allocation. A UE transmits CQI, PMI, and RI reporting on a PUSCH for those subframes with PUSCH allocation for a) scheduled PUSCH transmissions with or without an associated scheduling grant or b) PUSCH transmissions with no UL-SCH. The CQI transmissions on PUCCH and PUSCH for various scheduling modes are summarized in the following table:

Table 7.2-1: Physical Channels for Aperiodic or Periodic CQI reporting

Scheduling Mode Periodic CQI reporting channels Aperiodic CQI reporting channel

Frequency non-selective PUCCH

PUSCH

PUSCH

Frequency selective PUCCH

PUSCH

PUSCH

In case both periodic and aperiodic reporting would occur in the same subframe, the UE shall only transmit the aperiodic report in that subframe.

When reporting RI the UE reports a single instance of the number of useful transmission layers. For each RI reporting interval during closed-loop spatial multiplexing, a UE shall determine a RI from the supported set of RI values for the corresponding eNodeB and UE antenna configuration and report the number in each RI report. For each RI reporting interval during open-loop spatial multiplexing, a UE shall determine RI for the corresponding eNodeB and UE antenna configuration in each reporting interval and report the detected number in each RI report to support selection between RI=1 transmit diversity and RI>1 large delay CDD open-loop spatial multiplexing.

When reporting PMI the UE reports either a single or a multiple PMI report. The number of RBs represented by a single UE PMI report can be or a smaller subset of RBs. The number of RBs represented by a single PMI report is semi-statically configured by higher layer signalling. A UE is restricted to report PMI and RI within a precoder codebook subset specified by a bitmap configured by higher layer signalling. For a specific precoder codebook and associated transmission mode, the bitmap can specify all possible precoder codebook subsets from which the UE can assume the eNB may be using when the UE is configured in the relevant transmission mode.

DLRBN

The set of subbands (S) a UE shall evaluate for CQI reporting is semi-statically configured by higher layers. A subband is a set of k contiguous PRBs where k is also semi-statically configured by higher layers. Note the last subband in set S may have fewer than k contiguous PRBs depending on . The number of subbands for system

bandwidth given by is defined by . The term “Wideband CQI” denotes a CQI value obtained over the set S.

DLRBN

DLRBN ⎡ kNN /DL

RB= ⎤

For single-antenna port and transmit diversity, as well as open-loop spatial multiplexing, and closed-loop spatial multiplexing with RI=1 a single 4-bit wideband CQI is reported according to Table 7.2.3-1

For RI > 1, closed-loop spatial multiplexing PUSCH based triggered reporting includes reporting a wideband CQI which comprises:

o A 4-bit wideband CQI for codeword 1 according to Table 7.2.3-1

o A 4-bit wideband CQI for codeword 2 according to Table 7.2.3-1

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)16Release 8T

For RI > 1, closed-loop spatial multiplexing PUCCH based reporting includes separately reporting a 4-bit wideband CQI for codeword 1 according to Table 7.2.3-1 and a wideband spatial differential CQI each with a distinct reporting period and relative subframe offset. The wideband spatial differential CQI comprises:

o A 3-bit wideband spatial differential CQI for codeword 2 = wideband CQI index for codeword 1 – wideband CQI index for codeword 2. The set of exact offset levels is {-4, -3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3}

7.2.1 Aperiodic/Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUSCH A UE shall perform aperiodic CQI, PMI and RI reporting using the PUSCH upon receiving an indication sent in the scheduling grant.

The aperiodic CQI report size and message format is given by RRC.

The minimum reporting interval for aperiodic reporting of CQI and PMI and RI is 1 subframe. The subband size for CQI shall be the same for transmitter-receiver configurations with and without precoding.

A UE is semi-statically configured by higher layers to feed back CQI and PMI and corresponding RI on the same PUSCH using one of the following reporting modes given in Table 7.2.1-1 and described below:

Table 7.2.1-1: CQI and PMI Feedback Types for PUSCH reporting Modes

PMI Feedback Type

No PMI Single PMI Multiple PMI

Wideband Mode 1-2 (wideband CQI)

UE Selected Mode 2-0 Mode 2-1 Mode 2-2

(subband CQI)

Higher Layer-configured Mode 3-0 Mode 3-1 Mode 3-2

PUSC

H C

QI

Feed

back

Typ

e

(subband CQI) For each of the transmission modes defined in Section 7.1, the following reporting modes are supported on PUSCH:

1. Single-antenna port : Modes 2-0, 3-0 2. Transmit diversity : Modes 2-0, 3-0 3. Open-loop spatial multiplexing : Modes 2-0, 3-0 4. Closed-loop spatial multiplexing : Modes 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2

The selection of PMI and the calculation of CQI are both dependent on the RI value that the UE selects for the corresponding reporting instance.

• Wideband feedback

o Mode 1-2 description:

For each subband a preferred precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission only in the subband

A UE shall report one wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the corresponding selected precoding matrix in each subband and transmission on set S subbands.

The UE shall report the selected precoding matrix indicator for each set S subband.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)17Release 8T

Subband size is given by Table 7.2.1-2.

• Higher Layer-configured subband feedback


A UE shall report a wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming transmission on set S subbands

The UE shall also report one subband CQI value for each set S subband. The subband CQI value is calculated assuming transmission only in the subband The CQI represents channel quality for the first codeword, even when RI>1.


A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set S subbands

A UE shall report one subband CQI value per codeword for each set S subband which are calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matrix in all subbands

A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands

The UE shall report the single selected precoding matrix indicator


For each subband a preferred precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission only in the subband

A UE shall report one subband CQI value per codeword for each set S subband. The subband CQI value is calculated assuming the use of the corresponding selected precoding matrix in each set S subband.

A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the corresponding selected precoding matrix in each subband and transmission on set S subbands

A UE shall report the selected precoding matrix indicator for each set S subband.

o Subband CQI for each codeword are encoded differentially with respect to their respective wideband CQI using 2-bits as defined by

Subband differential CQI = subband CQI index – wideband CQI index

• Possible subband differential CQI values are {-2, 0, +1, +2}

o Supported subband size (k) used and number of subbands (M1) in the set of subands S contained in a report include those given in Table 7.2.1-2. In Table 7.2.1-2 the k values and M1 values are semi-statically configured by higher layers as a function of system bandwidth.

o The payload size P in bits for closed loop spatial multiplexing feedback modes (3-0, 3-1, 3-2) is given by

Mode 3-0 or Mode 3-1/3-2 with RI=1:

)()2(42)( CQIPMICTNRIRP +⋅++++=

Mode 3-1/3-2 with RI>1:

)()2()42(2)( CQIPMICTNRIRP +⋅+++⋅+=

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)18Release 8T

where T=2 if 4 antenna ports for common reference symbols are configured, for 2 antenna ports T=y, while for mode 3-0 then T=0

Editor’s note: RAN1 needs to agree on y.

where C=N for mode 3-2 else C=1 for mode 3-1 and C=0 for mode 3-0

where R=2 for up to 4-layer spatial multiplexing else R=1 for up to 2-layer spatial multiplexing and R=0 otherwise

Table 7.2.1-2: Subband Size and #Subband CQI in S vs. System Bandwidth

System Bandwidth Subband Size #Subband CQI in S DLRBN (k) (M1)

6 - 7 (wideband CQI only) 8 - 10 4

11 - 26 4 27 - 63 6 64 - 110 8

• UE-selected subband feedback


The UE shall select a set of M preferred subbands of size k (where k and M are given in Table 7.2.1-3 for each system bandwidth range) within the set of subbands S.

The UE shall also report one CQI value reflecting transmission only over the M selected subbands determined in the previous step. The CQI represents channel quality across all layers irrespective of computed or reported RI.

Additionally, the UE shall also report one wideband CQI value.



The UE shall perform joint selection of a set of M preferred subbands of size k within the set of subbands S assuming the use of selected preferred precoding matrix.

The UE shall report one CQI value per codeword reflecting transmission only over the selected M preferred subbands and using the same selected preferred single precoding matrix in each of the M subbands

A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the single preferred precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands

A UE shall also report the selected single preferred precoding matrix indicator for all set S subbands


The UE shall perform joint selection of the set of M preferred subbands of size k within the set of subbands S and a preferred single precoding matrix selected from the codebook subset that is preferred to be used for transmission over the M selected subbands.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)19Release 8T

The UE shall report one CQI value per codeword reflecting transmission only over the selected M preferred best subbands and using the same selected single precoding matrix in each of the M subbands.

The UE shall also report the selected single precoding matrix preferred for the M selected subbands.


A UE shall report a wideband CQI value per codeword which is calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands

A UE shall also report the selected single precoding matrix indicator for all set S subbands.

o For all UE-selected subband feedback modes the UE shall report the positions of the M selected subbands using a combinatorial index r defined as

∑−

= −−

=1

0

M

k

k

kMsN

r

where the set , ({ } 10−=

Mkks 1,1 +<≤≤ kkk ssNs ) contains the M sorted subband indices

and ⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

<

≥⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛=

yx

yxyx

yx

0 is the extended binomial coefficient, resulting in unique label

. ⎪⎭

⎪⎬⎫

⎪⎩

⎪⎨⎧

−⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛∈ 1,,0

MN

r

o The CQI value for the M selected subbands for each codeword is encoded differentially using 2-bits relative to its respective wideband CQI as defined by

Differential CQI = best-M average index – wideband CQI index

• Possible differential CQI values are {+1, +2, +3, +4}

o Supported subband size k and M values include those shown in Table 7.2.1-3. In Table 7.2.1-3 the k and M values are a function of system bandwidth.

o The payload size (P) in bits for closed loop spatial multiplexing feedback modes (2-0, 2-1, 2-2) is given by

Mode 2-0 or Mode 2-1/2-2 with RI=1:

P = R (RI) + CTL ⋅++++ )2(42 (CQI+PMI)

Mode 2-1/2-2 with RI>1:

P = R (RI) + CTL ⋅++++⋅ )2()42(2 (CQI+PMI)

where T=2 if 4 antenna ports for common reference symbols are configured, for 2 antenna ports T=y, while for mode 2-0 then T=0

Editor’s note: RAN1 needs to agree on y.

where C=2 for mode 2-2 and C=1 for mode 2-1 and C=0 for mode 2-0

where ⎥⎥⎥

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎡⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛=

MN

L 2log

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)20Release 8T

where R=2 for up to 4-layer spatial multiplexing else R=1 for up to 2-layer spatial multiplexing and R=0 otherwise

Table 7.2.1-3: Subband Size (k) and M values vs. Downlink System Bandwidth

System Bandwidth DLRBN Subband Size k (RBs) M

6 – 7 (wideband CQI only) (wideband CQI only) 8 – 10 2 1 11 - 26 2 3 27 - 63 3 5 64 - 110 4 6

7.2.2 Periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUCCH A UE is semi-statically configured by higher layers to periodically feed back different CQI, PMI, and RI on the PUCCH using the reporting modes given in Table 7.2.2-1 and described below. For the UE-selected subband CQI, a CQI report in a certain subframe describes the channel quality in a particular part or in particular parts of the bandwidth described subsequently as bandwidth part (BP) or parts.

• There are a total of N subbands for a system bandwidth given by whereDLRBN ⎣ ⎦kN /DL

RB subbands are of size k

and if then one of the subbands is of size⎡ ⎤ ⎣ ⎦ 0// DLRB

DLRB >− kNkN ⎣ ⎦kNkN /DL

RBDLRB ⋅− .

• A bandwidth part is frequency-consecutive and consists of subbands where J bandwidth parts span S or

as given in Table 7.2.2-2 and where is

JNDLRBN JN ⎡ ⎤JkN //DL

RB . Given J>1 then is either

or depending on , k and J.

JN ⎡ ⎤JkN //DLRB

⎡ ⎤ 1//DLRB −JkN DL

RBN

• Each bandwidth part j is scanned in sequential order as defined by the equation where

is a counter that a UE increments after each subband report transmission for a bandwidth part.

),mod( JNj SF=

SFN

• For UE selected subband feedback a single subband out of subbands of a bandwidth part is selected along

with a corresponding L-bit label where . JN

⎡ ⎤JNL 2log=

The CQI and PMI payload sizes of each PUCCH reporting mode are given in Table 7.2.2-3. Three CQI/PMI and RI reporting types with distinct periods and offsets are supported for each PUCCH reporting mode as given in Table 7.2.2-3:

• Type 1 report supports CQI feedback for the UE selected sub-bands • Type 2 report supports wideband CQI and PMI feedback. • Type 3 report supports RI feedback • Type 4 report supports wideband CQI

RI and wideband CQI/PMI are not reported in the same subframe (reporting instance):

• The reporting interval of the RI reporting is an integer multiple of wideband CQI/PMI period. • The same or different offsets between RI and wideband CQI/PMI reporting instances can be configured. • Both the reporting interval and offset are configured by higher layers. In case of collision of RI and wideband

CQI/PMI the wideband CQI/PMI is dropped.

The following PUCCH formats are used: • Format 2 as defined in section 5.4.2 in [3] when CQI/PMI or RI report is not multiplexed with ACK/NAK • Format 2a/2b as defined in section 5.4.2 in [3] when CQI/PMI or RI report is multiplexed with ACK/NAK for

normal CP

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)21Release 8T

• Format 2 as defined in section 5.4.2 in [3] when CQI/PMI or RI report is multiplexed with ACK/NAK for extended CP

Table 7.2.2-1: CQI and PMI Feedback Types for PUCCH reporting Modes

PMI Feedback Type No PMI Single PMI

Wideband Mode 1-0 Mode 1-1

(wideband CQI)

UE Selected Mode 2-0 Mode 2-1 PUC

CH

CQ

I

Fe

edba

ck T

ype

(subband CQI)

For each of the transmission modes defined in Section 7.1, the following reporting modes are supported on PUCCH:

1. Single-antenna port : Modes 1-0, 2-0 2. Transmit diversity : Modes 1-0, 2-0 3. Open-loop spatial multiplexing : Modes 1-0, 2-0 4. Closed-loop spatial multiplexing : Modes 1-1, 2-1

• Wideband feedback


In the subframe where RI is reported (only for open-loop spatial multiplexing):

• A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands.

• The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI.

In the subframe where CQI is reported:

• A UE shall report a type 4 report consisting of one wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming transmission on set S subbands. For open-loop spatial multiplexing the CQI is calculated conditioned on the last reported RI.


In the subframe where RI is reported (only for closed-loop spatial multiplexing):

• A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands. • The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI

In the subframe where CQI/PMI is reported: • A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming

transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI • A UE shall report a type 2 report on each respective successive reporting

opportunity consisting of

o A single wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming the use of a single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI.

o The selected single precoding matrix indicator (wideband PMI)

o When RI>1, a 3-bit wideband spatial differential CQI.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)22Release 8T

• UE Selected subband feedback


In the subframe where RI is reported (only for open-loop spatial multiplexing):

• A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands.

• The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI.

In the subframe where wideband CQI is reported:

• The UE shall report a type 4 report on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of one wideband CQI value conditioned on the last reported RI.

In the subframe where CQI for the selected subbands is reported:

• The UE shall select the preferred subband within the set of N subbands in each of the J bandwidth parts where J is given in Table 7.2.2-2. For open-loop spatial multiplexing, the selection is conditioned on the last reported RI.

• The UE shall report a type 1 report consisting of one CQI value reflecting transmission only over the selected subband of a bandwidth part determined in the previous step along with the corresponding best subband L-bit label. A type 1 report for each bandwidth part will in turn be reported in respective successive reporting opportunities. The CQI represents channel quality across all layers irrespective of the computed or reported RI. For open-loop spatial multiplexing, the selection is conditioned on the last reported RI


In the subframe where RI is reported: • A UE shall determine a RI assuming transmission on set S subbands. • The UE shall report a type 3 report consisting of one RI.

In the subframe where wideband CQI/PMI is reported: • A single precoding matrix is selected from the codebook subset assuming

transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI.

• A UE shall report a type 2 report on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of:

o A wideband CQI value which is calculated assuming the use of a single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands and conditioned on the last reported RI.

o The selected single precoding matrix indicator (wideband PMI).

o When RI>1, and additional 3-bit wideband spatial differential CQI.

In the subframe where CQI for the selected subbands is reported: • The UE shall select the preferred subband within the set of Nj subbands in each

of the J bandwidth parts where J is given in Table 7.2.2-2 conditioned on the last reported wideband PMI and RI.

• The UE shall report a type 1 report per bandwidth part on each respective successive reporting opportunity consisting of:

o A single CQI value 1 reflecting transmission only over the selected subband of a bandwidth part determined in the previous step along with the corresponding best subband L-bit label conditioned on the last reported wideband PMI and RI.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)23Release 8T

o If RI>1, an additional 3-bit spatial differential CQI represents the difference between CQI value 1 for codeword 1 and CQI value 2 for codeword 2 assuming the use of the most recently reported single precoding matrix in all subbands and transmission on set S subbands.

Table 7.2.2-2: Subband Size (k) and Bandwidth Parts (J) vs. Downlink System Bandwidth

System Bandwidth

Subband Size k (RBs)

Bandwidth Parts (J) DL

RBN6 – 7 (wideband CQI only) 1 8 – 10 4 1

11 – 26 4 2 27 – 64 6 3

65 – 110 8 4

The corresponding periodicity parameters for the different CQI/PMI modes are defined as:

• is the periodicity of the sub-frame pattern allocated for the CQI reports in terms of subframes were the

minimum reporting interval is . PN

PMINN

• is the subframe offset OFFSETN A UE with a scheduled PUSCH allocation in the same subframe as its CQI report shall use the same PUCCH-based reporting format when reporting CQI on the PUSCH unless an associated PDCCH with scheduling grant format indicates an aperiodic report is required.

Table 7.2.2-3: PUCCH Report Type Payload size per Reporting Mode

PUCCH Reporting Modes Mode 1-1 Mode 2-1 Mode 1-0 Mode 2-0PUCCH Reported Mode State Report

Type (bits/BP) (bits/BP) (bits/BP) (bits/BP)

RI = 1 NA 4+L NA 4+L Sub-band 1 CQI RI > 1 NA 7+L NA 4+L 2 TX Antennas RI = 1 NA NA 4 TX Antennas RI = 1 8 8 NA NA 2 TX Antennas RI > 1 NA NA

Wideband 2 CQI/PMI

4 TX Antennas RI > 1 11 11 NA NA 2-layer spatial multiplexing 1 1 1 1 3 RI 4-layer spatial multiplexing 2 2 2 2

Wideband 4 RI = 1 NA NA 4 4 CQI

7.2.3 Channel quality indicator (CQI) definition The number of entries in the CQI table for a single TX antenna = 16 as given by Table 7.2.3-1.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)24Release 8T

A single CQI index corresponds to an index pointing to a value in the CQI table. The CQI index is defined in terms of a channel coding rate value and modulation scheme (QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM), Based on an unrestricted observation interval in time and frequency, the UE shall report the highest tabulated CQI index for which a single PDSCH sub-frame with a transport format (modulation and coding rate) and number of REs corresponding to the reported or lower CQI index that could be received in a 2-slot downlink subframe aligned, reference period ending z slots before the start of the first slot in which the reported CQI index is transmitted and for which the transport block error probability would not exceed 0.1.

Editor’s note: RAN1 needs to agree on z.

The UE may assume the following in calculating the number of REs for the CQI calculation:

• 3 OFDM symbols for control signaling • No resources reserved for P/S-SCH and P-BCH • CP length of the non-MBSFN subframe

In deriving the CQI index, the UE may assume

• the MIMO mode (TxD or spatial multiplexing) • the nominal measurement offset is a parameter semi-statically configurable by higher layers of the data EPRE

with respect to the RS EPRE, from which the actual measurement offset of the data EPRE is derived

Table 7.2.3-1: 4-bit CQI Table

CQI index modulation coding rate x 1024

efficiency

0 out of range

1 QPSK 78 0.1523

2 QPSK 120 0.2344

3 QPSK 193 0.3770

4 QPSK 308 0.6016

5 QPSK 449 0.8770

6 QPSK 602 1.1758

7 16QAM 378 1.4766

8 16QAM 490 1.9141

9 16QAM 616 2.4063

10 64QAM 466 2.7305

11 64QAM 567 3.3223

12 64QAM 666 3.9023

13 64QAM 772 4.5234

14 64QAM 873 5.1152

15 64QAM 948 5.5547

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)25Release 8T

7.2.4 Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) definition For closed-loop spatial multiplexing transmission, precoding feedback is used for channel dependent codebook based precoding and relies on UEs reporting precoding matrix indicator (PMI). A UE shall report PMI based on the feedback modes described in 7.2.1 and 7.2.2. Each PMI value corresponds to a codebook index given in Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 or Table 6.3.4.2.3-2 of [3]. For open-loop spatial multiplexing transmission, PMI reporting is not supported.

8 Physical uplink shared channel related procedures For FDD, there shall be 8 HARQ processes in the uplink. For FDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDCCH with DCI format 0 and/or a PHICH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE, adjust the corresponding PUSCH transmission in subframe n+4 according to the PDCCH and PHICH information.

For TDD, the number of HARQ processes shall be determined by the DL/UL configuration. For TDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDCCH with DCI format 0 and/or a PHICH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE, adjust the corresponding PUSCH transmission in subframe n+k, with k>3 according to the PDCCH and PHICH information

8.1 Resource Allocation for PDCCH DCI Format 0 A resource allocation field in the scheduling grant consists of a resource indication value (RIV) corresponding to a starting resource block ( ) and a length in terms of contiguously allocated resource blocks ( ). The resource indication value is defined by

STARTRB CRBsL

if then ⎣ 2/)1( ULRBCRBs NL ≤− ⎦

STARTCRBsULRB )1( RBLNRIV +−=

else

)1()1( STARTULRBCRBs

ULRB

ULRB RBNLNNRIV −−++−=

For the case where an odd number of resource block pairs have been configured for PUCCH transmissions and a UE’s PUSCH resource allocation includes PRBs at a carrier band edge then the PRB of the allocated PUSCH band edge PRB pair occupied by the PUCCH resource slot will not be used for the PUSCH.

8.2 UE sounding procedure The following Sounding Reference Symbol (SRS) parameters are UE specific semi-statically configurable by higher layer signalling:

• RPF=2 transmission comb assignment and location

• Duration of SRS transmission (valid until disabled or until the session ends)

• Periodicity of SRS transmissions: {2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320} ms

• Symbol location in the subframe

• Frequency hopping

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)26Release 8T

• Cyclic shift

• Bandwidth of SRS transmission which does not include the PUCCH region

o Narrowband SRS: BW=2 RB if else BW=2, 4, or 6 RB if 6ULRB ≤N 6UL

RB >N

A UE shall not transmit SRS in the case of simultaneous CQI and SRS transmission.

When a UE is RRC configured to support both A/N and SRS transmissions in the same subframe, then the UE shall transmit A/N using a shortened PUCCH format where the A/N symbol corresponding to the SRS location is punctured. When a UE is not RRC configured to support both A/N and SRS transmissions in the same subframe then the UE shall only transmit the A/N using PUCCH format 1a or 1b as defined in Section 5.4.1 of [3].

A UE shall not transmit SRS in the case of simultaneous SR and SRS transmission..

8.2.1 Sounding definition

8.3 UE ACK/NACK procedure When A/N and SR are transmitted in the same sub-frame a UE shall transmit the A/N on its assigned ACK/NACK PUCCH resource for a negative SR transmission and transmit the A/N on its assigned SR PUCCH resource for a positive SR transmission.

When only an ACK/NACK or only a SR is transmitted a UE shall use PUCCH Format 1a or 1b for the ACK/NACK resource and PUCCH Format 1 for the SR resource as defined in section 5.4.1 in [3].

8.4 UE PUSCH Hopping procedure The UE shall perform PUSCH frequency hopping if the single bit frequency hopping (FH) field in a corresponding PDCCH with DCI format 0 is set otherwise no PUSCH frequency hopping is performed.

A UE performing PUSCH frequency hopping shall determine its PUSCH resource allocation for the first slot of a subframe (S1) including the lowest index PRB ( ) in subframe n from a subset of the type 2 resource allocation field in a corresponding PDCCH with DCI format 0 received on subframe n-4. For a non-adaptive retransmission of a packet on a dynamically assigned PUSCH resource a UE shall determine its hopping type based on the last received PDCCH with DCI Format 0 associated with the packet. For a PUSCH transmission on a persistently allocated resource on subframe n in the absence of a corresponding PDCCH with a DCI Format 0 in subframe n-4, the UE shall determine its hopping type based on the hopping information in the initial grant that assigned the persistent resource allocation. The initial grant is either a PDCCH with DCI Format 0 or is higher layer signaled.

)(1 nnSPRB

The subset of the type 2 resource allocation field excludes either 1 or 2 bits used for hopping information as indicated by Table 8.4-1 below where the number of PUSCH resource blocks is defined as where

is defined in [3]. The resource indication value (RIV) is defined as

where

PUCCHRB

ULRB

PUSCHRB NNN −=

PUCCHRBN

∑−

=−′+−=

2

0STARTCRBs

PUSCHRB

CRBs

)1(L

iiBRLNRIV 0START =′BR is the first PRB after PUCCH.

A UE performing PUSCH frequency hopping shall use one of two possible PUSCH frequency hopping types based on the hopping information. PUSCH hopping type 1 is described in section 8.4.1 and type 2 is described in section 8.4.2.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)27Release 8T

Table 8.4-1: Min PUCCH BW, Max PUSCH BW, and Number of Hopping Bits vs. System Bandwidth

Minimum PUCCH BW in 1st Slot (#RBs)

Max BW assigned to a hopping User

#Hopping bits for 2nd slot RA

System BW

ULRBN

6-14 1 1 ⎣ ⎦2/PUSCHRBN

15-24 2 6 1

25-49 Any 8 1

50-74 Any 8 2

75-99 Any 12 2

100-110 Any 20 2

For either hopping type a single bit signaled by higher layers indicates whether PUSCH frequency hopping is inter-subframe only or both intra and inter-subframe.

Editor’s note: RAN1 needs to determine if hopping RB-pairing must always be supported.

8.4.1 Type 1 PUSCH Hopping )(~ inPRBFor PUSCH hopping type 1 the hopping bit or bits indicated in Table 8.4-1 determine as defined in Table 8.4-2.

The lowest index PRB ( ) of the 11SPRBn st slot RA in subframe i is defined as . The

lowest index PRB ( ) of the 2

⎡ ⎤2/)(~)( 11 PUCCHRB

SPRB

SPRB Ninin +=

⎣ ⎦2/)(~)( PUCCHRBPRBPRB Ninin +=nd slot RA in subframe i is defined as . )(inPRB

8.4.2 Type 2 PUSCH Hopping )(~ inPRBPUSCH hopping type 2 uses a predefined hopping sequence (PHS) to determine and the lowest index PRB

( ) of the 2 PUCCHRBPRBPRB Ninin += )(~)( )(~ inPRB

nd slot RA in subframe i as defined by )(inPRB where the PHS and are defined in [3] section 5.3.4.

Table 8.4-2: PDCCH DCI Format 0 Hopping Bit Definition

System BW

Number of

Hopping bits Information in hopping bits )(~ inPRB UL

RBN

⎣ ⎦ PUSCHRB

SPRB

PUSCHRB NinN mod)(~2/ 1 ⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ + , 0

6 – 49 1

1 section 5.3.4 in [3]

⎣ ⎦ PUSCHRB

SPRB


⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ + 00 50 – 110 2

⎣ ⎦ PUSCHRB

SPRB


⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ +− 01

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)28Release 8T

⎣ ⎦ PUSCHRB

SPRB


⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ + 10

11 section 5.3.4 in [3]

8.5 UE Reference Symbol procedure If UL sequence hopping is configured in the cell, it applies to all reference symbols (SRS, PUSCH and PUCCH RS).

9 Physical downlink control channel procedures

9.1 UE procedure for determining physical downlink control channel assignment

9.1.1 PDCCH Assignment Procedure A UE is required to monitor a set of PDCCH candidates as often as every sub-frame. The number of candidate PDCCHs in the set and configuration of each candidate is configured by the higher layer signalling.

A UE determines the control region size to monitor in each subframe based on PCFICH which indicates the number of OFDM symbols (l) in the control region (l=1, 2, or 3) and PHICH symbol duration (M) received from the PBCH where

. For unicast subframes M=1 or 3 while for MBSFN subframes M=1 or 2. Ml ≥

A UE shall monitor (perform blind decoding of) all candidate PDCCH payloads possible for each of its assigned search spaces in a given subframe control region. A search space is a set of aggregated control channel elements where aggregation size can be 1, 2, 4, or 8 control channel elements. There is one aggregation size per Search space. The candidate PDCCH locations in a search space occur every B control channel elements where B is the aggregation size. A UE shall be required to monitor both common and UE-specific search spaces. A common search space is monitored by all UEs in a cell and generally supports a limited number of aggregation levels, DCI format types, and blind decodes compared to the UE-specific search space. A UE-specific search space supports all aggregation levels with more blind decodes (than common search space) and for some system bandwidths only a subset of UEs in a cell monitor it. A UE-specific search space may overlap with a common search space.

9.1.2 PHICH Assignment Procedure For scheduled PUSCH transmissions, a UE shall implicitly determine the corresponding PHICH resource in subframe n from the lowest index PRB of the uplink resource allocation and the 3-bit uplink demodulation reference symbol (DMRS) cyclic shift both indicated in the PDCCH with DCI format 0 received on subframe n-4. The PHICH resource is identified by the index pair where is the PHICH group number and is the orthogonal sequence index within the group as defined by:

),( seqPHICH

groupPHICH nn group

PHICHn seqPHICHn

⎣ ⎦ PHICHSFDMRS

groupPHICH

indexlowestRAPRB

seqPHICH

groupPHICHDMRS

indexlowestRAPRB

groupPHICH

NnNIn

NnIn

2mod)/(

mod)(

__

__

+=

+=

where

• is the cyclic shift of the DMRS used in the UL transmission for which the PHICH is related. DMRSn

• is the spreading factor size used for PHICH modulation as described in section 6.9.1 in [3]. PHICHSFN

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)29Release 8T

• is the lowest index PRB of the uplink resource allocation indexlowestRAPRBI _

_

• is the number of PHICH groups configured groupPHICHN

10 Physical uplink control channel procedures

10.1 UE procedure for determining physical uplink control channel assignment

The resource blocks reserved for PUCCHs in a sub-frame are semi-statically configured.

For a PDSCH transmission on subframe n corresponding to a PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 received on subframe n-4, the UE shall determine the PUCCH index for ACK/NACK implicitly from the lowest CCE index used to construct the associated PDCCH.

For each PDSCH transmission corresponding to a configured scheduling assignment the UE shall use a PUCCH index for ACK/NACK previously received explicitly from higher layer signalling associated with the configured scheduling assignment. While the configured scheduling assignment is valid a UE shall continue to use the explicitly signalled PUCCH index for ACK/NACK for a PDSCH transmission on subframe n when no corresponding PDCCH with DCI format 1A/1/2 was received on subframe n-4.

10.2 Uplink ACK/NACK timing For FDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDSCH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE and for which an ACK/NACK shall be provided, transmit the ACK/NACK response in subframe n+4.

For TDD, the UE shall upon detection of a PDSCH transmission in subframe n intended for the UE and for which an ACK/NACK shall be provided, transmit the ACK/NACK response in UL subframe n+k, with k>3.

For TDD, the use of a single ACK/NACK response for providing HARQ feedback for multiple PDSCH transmissions is supported by performing logical AND of all the corresponding individual PDSCH transmission ACK/NACKs.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.213 V8.2.0 (2008-03)30Release 8T

3GPP


Change history Date TSG # TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Old New 2006-09 Draft version created 0.0.02006-10 Endorsed by RAN1 0.0.0 0.1.02007-01 Inclusion of decisions from RAN1#46bis and RAN1#47 0.1.0 0.1.12007-01 Endorsed by RAN1 0.1.1 0.2.02007-02 Inclusion of decisions from RAN1#47bis 0.2.0 0.2.12007-02 Endorsed by RAN1 0.2.1 0.3.02007-02 Editor’s version including decisions from RAN1#48 & RAN1#47bis 0.3.0 0.3.12007-03 Updated Editor’s version 0.3.1 0.3.22007-03 RAN#35 RP-070171 For information at RAN#35 0.3.2 1.0.02007-03 Random access text modified to better reflect RAN1 scope 1.0.0 1.0.12007-03 Updated Editor’s version 1.0.1 1.0.22007-03 Endorsed by RAN1 1.0.2 1.1.02007-05 Updated Editor’s version 1.1.0 1.1.12007-05 Updated Editor’s version 1.1.1 1.1.22007-05 Endorsed by RAN1 1.1.2 1.2.02007-08 Updated Editor’s version 1.2.0 1.2.12007-08 Updated Editor’s version – uplink power control from RAN1#49bis 1.2.1 1.2.22007-08 Endorsed by RAN1 1.2.2 1.3.02007-09 Updated Editor’s version reflecting RAN#50 decisions 1.3.0 1.3.12007-09 Updated Editor’s version reflecting comments 1.3.1 1.3.22007-09 Updated Editor’s version reflecting further comments 1.3.2 1.3.32007-09 Updated Editor’s version reflecting further comments 1.3.3 1.3.42007-09 Updated Edtior’s version reflecting further comments 1.3.4 1.3.52007-09 RAN#37 RP-070731 Endorsed by RAN1 1.3.5 2.0.02007-09 RAN#37 RP-070737 For approval at RAN#37 2.0.0 2.1.012/09/07 RAN_37 RP-070737 - - Approved version 2.1.0 8.0.028/11/07 RAN_38 RP-070949 0001 2 Update of 36.213 8.0.0 8.1.005/03/08 RAN_39 RP-080145 0002 - Update of TS36.213 according to changes listed in cover sheet 8.1.0 8.2.0



Physical layer – Measurements(Release 8)

The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP. The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented. This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification.Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners’ Publications Offices.

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)2Release 8T


3GPP

Postal address


Valbonne – Franc e Tel. : +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax : +33 4 93 65 47 16

Internet http ://www.3gpp.org





3GPP

http://www.3gpp.org/

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)3Release 8T

Contents Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................4 1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................................5 2 References ................................................................................................................................................5 3 Definitions, symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................5 3.1 Definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 5 3.2 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................. 6 3.3 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................................... 6 4 Control of UE/E-UTRAN measurements.................................................................................................6 5 Measurement capabilities for E-UTRA....................................................................................................6 5.1 UE measurement capabilities............................................................................................................................. 7 5.1.1 Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) .................................................................................................. 7 5.1.2 E-UTRA Carrier RSSI ................................................................................................................................. 7 5.1.3 Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ)............................................................................................... 7 5.1.4 UTRA FDD CPICH RSCP .......................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.5 UTRA FDD carrier RSSI ............................................................................................................................. 8 5.1.6 UTRA FDD CPICH Ec/No .......................................................................................................................... 8 5.1.7 GSM carrier RSSI ........................................................................................................................................ 8 5.1.8 UTRA TDD carrier RSSI............................................................................................................................. 9 5.1.9 UTRA TDD P-CCPCH RSCP ..................................................................................................................... 9 5.1.10 CDMA2000 1x RTT Pilot Strength ............................................................................................................. 9 5.1.11 CDMA2000 HRPD Pilot Strength ............................................................................................................... 9 5.2 E-UTRAN measurement abilities ...................................................................................................................... 9 5.2.1 DL RS TX power ....................................................................................................................................... 10 5.2.2 Measurement 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 10


3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)4Release 8T



Version x.y.z

where:

x the first digit:




Y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc.


3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)5Release 8T

1 Scope The present document contains the description and definition of the measurements done at the UE and network in order to support operation in idle mode and connected mode.





[1] 3GPP TR 21.905: “Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications”.

[2] 3GPP TS 36.201: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical Layer – General Description “.

[3] 3GPP TS 36.211: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation”.

[4] 3GPP TS 36.212: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding “.

[5] 3GPP TS 36.213: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures “.

[6] 3GPP TS 36.321: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification“.

[7] 3GPP TS 36.331: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification “.

[8] 3GPP2 CS.0005-D v1.0 “Upper Layer (Layer 3) Signaling Standard for CDMA2000 Spread Spectrum Systems Release D”.

[9] 3GPP2 CS.0024-A v3.0 “cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification”

[10] 3GPP TS 36.104: “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception “.


3.1 Definitions For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)6Release 8T


Ec/No Received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band

3.3 Abbreviations For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].

1x RTT CDMA2000 1x Radio Transmission Technology CPICH Common Pilot Channel E-UTRA Evolved UTRA E-UTRAN Evolved UTRAN FDD Frequency Division Duplex GSM Global System for Mobile communication HRPD CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data P-CCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel RSCP Received Signal Code Power RSRP Reference Signal Received Power RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator TDD Time Division Duplex UTRA Universal Terrestrial Radio Access UTRAN Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network

4 Control of UE/E-UTRAN measurements In this chapter the general measurement control concept of the higher layers is briefly described to provide an understanding on how L1 measurements are initiated and controlled by higher layers.

With the measurement specifications L1 provides measurement capabilities for the UE and E-UTRAN. These measurements can be classified in different reported measurement types: intra-frequency, inter-frequency, inter-system, traffic volume, quality and UE internal measurements (see the RRC Protocol [7]).

In the L1 measurement definitions, see chapter 5, the measurements are categorised as measurements in the UE (the messages for these will be described in the MAC Protocol [6] or RRC Protocol [7]) or measurements in the E-UTRAN (the messages for these will be described in the Frame Protocol).

To initiate a specific measurement, the E-UTRAN transmits a ‘RRC connection reconfiguration message' to the UE including a measurement ID and type, a command (setup, modify, release), the measurement objects, the measurement quantity, the reporting quantities and the reporting criteria (periodical/event-triggered), see [7].

When the reporting criteria are fulfilled the UE shall answer with a 'measurement report message' to the E-UTRAN including the measurement ID and the results.

For idle mode, the measurement information elements are broadcast in the System Information.

5 Measurement capabilities for E-UTRA In this chapter the physical layer measurements reported to higher layers are defined.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)7Release 8T

5.1 UE measurement capabilities The structure of the table defining a UE measurement quantity is shown below.

Column field Comment Definition Contains the definition of the measurement. Applicable for States in which state(s) it shall be possible to perform this measurement. The following terms are

used in the tables: RRC_IDLE; RRC_CONNECTED;

Intra-frequency appended to the RRC state:

Shall be possible to perform in the corresponding RRC state on an intra-frequency cell; Inter-frequency appended to the RRC state:

Shall be possible to perform in the corresponding RRC state on an inter-frequency cell Inter-RAT appended to the RRC state:

Shall be possible to perform in the corresponding RRC state on an inter-RAT cell.

5.1.1 Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP)

Definition Reference signal received power (RSRP), is determined for a considered cell as the linear average over the power contributions (in [W]) of the resource elements that carry cell-specific reference signals within the considered measurement frequency bandwidth. For RSRP determination the cell-specific reference signals R0 and if available R1 according TS 36.211 [3] can be used. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the reported value shall be equivalent to the linear average of the power values of all diversity branches.

Applicable for RRC_IDLE intra-frequency, RRC_IDLE inter-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED intra-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED inter-frequency

Note: The number of resource elements within the considered measurement frequency bandwidth and within the measurement period that are used by the UE to determine RSRP is left up to the UE implementation with the limitation that corresponding measurement accuracy requirements have to be fulfilled.

5.1.2 E-UTRA Carrier RSSI

Definition E-UTRA Carrier Received Signal Strength Indicator, comprises the total received wideband power observed by the UE from all sources, including co-channel serving and non-serving cells, adjacent channel interference, thermal noise etc.

Applicable for TBD

5.1.3 Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ)

Definition Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ) is defined as the ratio N×RSRP/(E-UTRA carrier RSSI), where N is the number of RB’s of the E-UTRA carrier RSSI measurement bandwidth. The measurements in the numerator and denominator shall be made over the same set of resource blocks.

Applicable for RRC_IDLE intra-frequency, RRC_IDLE inter-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED intra-frequency, RRC_CONNECTED inter-frequency

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)8Release 8T

5.1.4 UTRA FDD CPICH RSCP

Definition Received Signal Code Power, the received power on one code measured on the Primary CPICH. The reference point for the RSCP shall be the antenna connector of the UE. If Tx diversity is applied on the Primary CPICH the received code power from each antenna shall be separately measured and summed together in [W] to a total received code power on the Primary CPICH. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the reported value shall not be lower than the corresponding CPICH RSCP of any of the individual receive antenna branches.

Applicable for RRC_IDLE inter-RAT, RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT

5.1.5 UTRA FDD carrier RSSI

Definition The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna connector of the UE. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the reported value shall not be lower than the corresponding UTRA carrier RSSI of any of the individual receive antenna branches.


5.1.6 UTRA FDD CPICH Ec/No

Definition The received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band. If receiver diversity is not in use by the UE, the CPICH Ec/No is identical to CPICH RSCP/UTRA Carrier RSSI. Measurement shall be performed on the Primary CPICH. The reference point for the CPICH Ec/No shall be the antenna connector of the UE. If Tx diversity is applied on the Primary CPICH the received energy per chip (Ec) from each antenna shall be separately measured and summed together in [Ws] to a total received chip energy per chip on the Primary CPICH, before calculating the Ec/No. If receiver diversity is in use by the UE, the measured CPICH Ec/No value shall not be lower than the corresponding CPICH RSCPi/UTRA Carrier RSSIi of receive antenna branch i .


5.1.7 GSM carrier RSSI

Definition Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the relevant channel bandwidth. Measurement shall be performed on a GSM BCCH carrier. The reference point for the RSSI shall be the antenna connector of the UE.


3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)9Release 8T

5.1.8 UTRA TDD carrier RSSI

Definition The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna connector of the UE.


5.1.9 UTRA TDD P-CCPCH RSCP

Definition Received Signal Code Power, the received power on P-CCPCH of a neighbour UTRA TDD cell. The reference point for the RSCP shall be the antenna connector of the UE.


5.1.10 CDMA2000 1x RTT Pilot Strength

Definition CDMA2000 1x RTT Pilot Strength measurement is defined in section 2.6.6.2.2 of [8] Applicable for RRC_IDLE inter-RAT,

RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT

5.1.11 CDMA2000 HRPD Pilot Strength

Definition CDMA2000 HRPD Pilot Strength Measurement is defined in section 8.7.6.1.2.3 of [9] Applicable for RRC_IDLE inter-RAT,

RRC_CONNECTED inter-RAT

5.2 E-UTRAN measurement abilities The structure of the table defining a E-UTRAN measurement quantity is shown below.

Column field Comment Definition Contains the definition of the measurement.

The term "antenna connector" used in this sub-clause to define the reference point for the E-UTRAN measurements refers to the "BS antenna connector" test port A and test port B as described in [10]. The term "antenna connector" refers to Rx or Tx antenna connector as described in the respective measurement definitions.

3GPP

3GPP TS 36.214 V8.2.0 (2008-03)10Release 8T

5.2.1 DL RS TX power

Definition Downlink reference signal transmit power is determined for a considered cell as the linear average over the power contributions (in [W]) of the resource elements that carry cell-specific reference signals which are transmitted by the eNode B within its operating system bandwidth. For DL RS TX power determination the cell-specific reference signals R0 and if available R1 according TS 36.211 [3] can be used. The reference point for the DL RS TX power measurement shall be the TX antenna connector.

5.2.2 Measurement 2


Change history Date TSG # TSG Doc. CR Rev Subject/Comment Old New 02/10/06 - - - Draft version created - 0.0.011/10/06 - - - Minor editorial updates for RAN1#46bis 0.0.0 0.0.113/10/06 - - - Endorsed skeleton 0.0.1 0.1.027/02/07 - - - Update after 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 #48 0.1.0 0.1.105/03/07 - - - RAN1 endorsed version 0.1.1 0.2.003/05/07 - - - Update after 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#48bis 0.2.0 0.2.108/03/07 - - - RAN WG1#49 endorsed version 0.2.1 0.3.031/05/07 RAN#36 RP-070490 - Presented for information at RAN#36 0.3.0 1.0.021/06/07 - - - Update after 3GPP TSG RAN #36 1.0.0 1.0.125/06/07 - - - 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#49bis endorsed version 1.0.1 1.1.017/08/07 - - - Update after 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#48bis 1.1.0 1.1.120/08/07 - - - 3GPP TSG RAN WG1#50 endorsed version 1.1.1 1.2.010/09/07 RAN#37 RP-070732 - For approval at RAN#37 1.2.0 2.0.012/09/07 RAN_37 RP-070732 - - Approved version 2.0.0 8.0.028/11/07 RAN_38 RP-070949 1 1 RRC state correction for LTE UE measurements 8.0.0 8.1.005/03/08 RAN_39 RP-080145 003 1 Inclusion of agreements from RAN1#51bis and RAN1#52 8.1.0 8.2.0

3GPP

LTE Physical Layer

Documents